No category

Download 1996 Taurus Owner Guide - Taurus

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

261

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

269

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

292

293

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

328

329

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

350

351

352

353

354

355

356

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

364

365

366

367

368

369

Transcript

File:01fcpit.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:39:52 1996
[PI00080( T)04/95]
thirty-six pica chart:
File:01fcpit.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:39:52 1996
*[PI00100(ALL)09/95]
thirty-six pica chart:
File:01fcpit.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:39:52 1996
*[PI00560(ALL)05/95]
Table of Contents
Introductory Information ............................. 1
Safety Restraints ............................................ 9
Starting Your Taurus .................................. 59
Warning Lights and Gauges ..................... 71
Instrument Panel Controls ........................ 91
Steering Column Controls ...................... 115
Features ........................................................ 125
Electronic Sound Systems ....................... 169
Driving Your Taurus ................................ 191
Roadside Emergencies .............................. 217
Customer Assistance ................................. 237
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 244
Accessories .................................................. 249
Servicing Your Taurus ............................. 255
Quick Index ................................................ 341
Index ............................................................. 357
Service Station Information .................... 380
File:02fcint.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:41:04 1996
Introductory Information
*[IN00300(ALL)04/95]
*[IN00400(ALL)10/95]
Ford’s Commitment to You
At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the
continuous commitment to achieve the best
result possible. It is dedication to learning what
you want, determination to develop the right
concept, and execution of that concept with care,
precision, and attention to detail. In short,
excellence means being the standard by which
others are judged.
*[IN00500(ALL)04/95]
*[IN00600(ALL)04/95]
Our Guiding Principles
*[IN00700(ALL)04/95]
❑ You are the focus of everything we do. Our
*[IN00750(ALL)04/95]
❑ Continuous improvement is essential to our
*[IN00800(ALL)04/95]
❑ Employee involvement is our way of life.
*[IN00900(ALL)04/95]
❑ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We
❑ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the
quality of our products and services must be
our number one priority.
work must be done with you in mind,
providing better products and services than
our competition.
success. We must strive for excellence in
everything we do: in our products — in their
safety and value — and in our services, our
human relations, our competitiveness, and
our profitability.
We are a team. We must treat one another
with trust and respect.
must maintain mutually beneficial
relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our
other business associates.
1
File:02fcint.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:41:04 1996
*[IN01000(ALL)04/95]
❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct
*[IN01100(ALL)08/95]
Things to Know About Using
This Guide
*[IN01200(ALL)08/95]
Congratulations on the purchase of your new
vehicle. This guide has information about the
equipment and the options for your new vehicle.
You may not have bought all of the options
available to you. If you do not know which
information applies to your vehicle, talk to your
dealer.
*[IN01300(ALL)08/95]
This guide describes equipment and gives
specifications for equipment that was in effect
when this guide was approved for printing. Ford
may discontinue models or change specifications
or design without any notice and without
incurring obligation.
*[IN01400(ALL)07/95]
*[IN01420(ALL)05/95]
NOTES and WARNINGS
*[IN01440(ALL)05/95]
WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful
in those areas where carelessness can cause
damage to your vehicle or personal injury to
yourself, your passengers or other people. Please
read all WARNINGS carefully.
*[IN01460(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
worldwide must be pursued in a manner that
is socially responsible and commands respect
for its integrity and for its positive
contributions to society.
NOTES give you additional information about
the subject matter you are referencing.
2
File:02fcint.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:41:04 1996
*[IN01500(ALL)08/95]
*[IN01600(ALL)04/95]
Finding Information in This Guide
*[IN01700(ALL)08/95]
The Quick Index at the end of the book
provides a page number following each item
which indicates where detailed information can
be found.
*[IN01900(ALL)08/95]
To use the Index, turn to the back of the book
and search in the alphabetical listing for the
word that best describes the information you
need. If the word you chose is not listed, think
of other related words and look them up. We
have designed the Index so that you can find
information under a technical term.
*[IN02000(ALL)08/95]
*[IN02100(ALL)08/95]
Canadian Owners — French Version
%
After you have read this guide once, you will
probably return to it when you have a specific
question or need additional information. To help
you find specific information quickly, you can
use the Quick Index or the Index.
French Owner Guides can be obtained from your
dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
%
Your Maintenance Schedule and
Record Booklet
*[IN02500(ALL)03/95]
The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists
the services that are most important for keeping
your vehicle in good condition. A record log is
also provided to help you keep track of all
services performed.
*[IN02400(ALL)04/95]
3
File:02fcint.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:41:04 1996
%
*[IN02600(ALL)01/95]
*[IN02700(ALL)04/95]
About the Warranties
Your vehicle is covered by three types of
warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended
Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions
Warranties.
%
Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully
to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and
your basic rights and responsibilities.
*[IN03300(ALL)03/95]
If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you
can get a new one free of charge. Contact any
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the
addresses and phone numbers on the first page
of this owner guide.
*[IN04000(ALL)01/95]
*[IN04100(ALL)01/94]
Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan
*[IN04200(ALL)01/95]
You do not have to buy this option when you
buy your vehicle. However, your option to
purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs
out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your
dealer for more details about the Ford Extended
Service Plan.
*[IN04250(ALL)01/95]
If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not
take advantage of the Ford Extended Service
Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be
eligible. See your dealer for the details.
*[IN03100(ALL)03/95]
%
If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can
buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your
vehicle. This optional contract provides service
protection for a longer period of time than the
basic warranty that comes with your vehicle.
4
File:02fcint.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:41:04 1996
%
*[IN06000(ALL)01/95]
*[IN06100(ALL)03/95]
*[IN06300(ALL)01/95]
%
Breaking Your Vehicle In
Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or
break-in period during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in
period, you need to pay careful attention to how
you drive your vehicle.
❑ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle
has new brake linings, you should take these
steps:
*[IN06400(ALL)01/95]
— Watch traffic carefully so that you can
anticipate when to stop.
*[IN06500(ALL)01/95]
*[IN06600(ALL)01/95]
*[IN06700(ALL)01/95]
— Begin braking well in advance.
*[IN06800(ALL)01/95]
%
— Apply the brakes gradually.
The break-in period for new brake linings
lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or
1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.
❑ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford
recommends. See Engine oil recommendations
in the Index. Do not use special “break-in”
oils.
[IN06810(ALL)04/95]
Safety Labels
[IN06820(ALL)04/95]
There are labels, decals and tags on your vehicle
to alert you about possible hazards. The signal
word on the label tells you the degree of hazard
and is used in the following ways:
❑ DANGER: Used to indicate the presence of a
hazard which will cause severe personal
injury or death if the warning is ignored.
❑ WARNING: Used to indicate the presence of
a hazard which can cause severe personal
injury or death if the warning is ignored.
❑ CAUTION: Used to indicate the presence of a
hazard which will or can cause minor
personal injury or property damage if the
warning is ignored.
[IN06830(ALL)04/95]
[IN06840(ALL)04/95]
[IN06850(ALL)04/95]
5
File:02fcint.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:41:04 1996
%
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
*[IN07001(ALL)07/95]
Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage
the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your
vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.
*[IN07101(ALL)07/95]
Take similar precautions if your vehicle is
exposed to chemical industrial fallout.
*[IN07201(ALL)07/95]
Paint damage resulting from fallout is not
related to a defect in paint materials or
workmanship and therefore is not covered by
warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual
improvement in customer satisfaction is a high
priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its
dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by
environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000
miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes
first. Customers may be required to bring their
vehicle in for inspection by a Ford
representative.
*[IN06900(ALL)04/95]
%
Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle
[IN07401(ALL)03/95]
Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the
underside, with a cleaner made for washing cars.
If your vehicle has clear-coat, make sure that the
cleaner is recommended for clear-coat.
*[IN07501(ALL)06/95]
*[IN07601(ALL)04/95]
*[IN07701(ALL)04/95]
DO NOT:
*[IN07801(ALL)04/95]
*[IN07901(ALL)04/95]
❑ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot
*[IN07301(ALL)04/95]
❑ Wash your vehicle with hot water
❑ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct
sunlight
Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits
and protect the finish.
6
File:02fcint.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:41:04 1996
*[IN08101(ALL)04/95]
*[IN08201(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts
*[IN08301(ALL)04/95]
*[IN08401(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning Plastic Parts
*[IN08501(ALL)04/95]
Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents
or petroleum-based cleaners.
%
%
*[IN08701(ALL)04/95]
%
Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild
detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, fuel or strong detergents.
Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are
plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if
necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine
cleaning.
If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove
oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil
remover. If rustproofing is not removed from
plastic and rubber parts, it can cause
deterioration.
7
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
Safety Restraints
%
*[SR00500(ALL)04/95]
*[SR00600(ALL)03/95]
Important Safety Belt Information
The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and
your passengers in case of a collision. In most
states and in Canada the law requires their use.
*[SR00700(ALL)08/95]
*[SR00800(ALL)08/95]
*[SR00900(ALL)08/95]
*[SR01000(ALL)08/95]
*[SR01100(ALL)08/95]
*[SR01200(ALL)08/95]
*[SR02200(ALL)07/95]
Safety belts provide best restraint when:
*[SR02300(ALL)07/95]
See the following sections in this chapter for
directions on how to properly use these safety
belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this
chapter for special instructions about using
safety belts for children.
❑ the seatback is upright
❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)
❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips
❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest
❑ the knees are straight forward
To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,
a warning light may come on and a chime may
sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime in
the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.
9
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR02350(ALL)12/95]
RWARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
*[SR02400(ALL)05/95]
%
RWARNING
Make sure that you and your passengers
wear safety belts. Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
*[SR02700(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. Never swing it around the neck over
the inside shoulder. Never use a single
belt for more than one person or across
more than one seating position. Each
seating position in your vehicle has a
specific safety belt assembly which is
made up of one buckle and one tongue
that are designed to be used as a pair.
Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury
in a collision.
10
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR02850(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Ford recommends that all safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should
be inspected by a qualified technician
after any collision. Safety belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
*[SR02900(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, children should always ride with
the seatback upright.
*[SR03000(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his
or her lap while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision.
*[SR03200(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Lock the doors of your vehicle before
driving to lessen the risk of the door
coming open in a collision.
11
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
%
Combination Lap and Shoulder
Belts
*[SR03900(ALL)06/95]
While your vehicle is in motion, the combination
lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.
However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the lap/shoulder belt locks
and helps reduce your forward movement.
*[SR04000(ALL)05/95]
After you get into your vehicle, close the door
and lock it. Then adjust the seat to the position
that suits you best.
*[SR04100(ALL)05/95]
Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the
retractor so that the shoulder portion of the belt
crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt
is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insert
the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you
hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by
pulling on tongue.
*[SR03600(ALL)05/95]
*[SR04200(ALL)06/95]
quarter page art:0010018-B
Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt
*[SR04300(ALL)07/95]
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand
Important Safety Belt Information at
the beginning of this chapter.
12
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR04500(ALL)06/95]
one third page art:0000685-I
Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts —
front and rear outboard seating positions
*[SR04700(ALL)07/95]
While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its
original position to prevent it from striking you
or the vehicle.
[SR05625(ALL)04/95]
Safety Belts for Front Outboard Passenger
and Rear Outboard Seating Positions
(Except Wagon Rear-Facing Seat)
*[SR05650(ALL)08/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking
mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the
front seat outboard passenger and rear outboard
passengers.
*[SR05670(ALL)08/95]
Dual locking mode retractors operate in two
ways:
*[SR05675(ALL)08/95]
*[SR05700(ALL)10/95]
Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt
retractor will allow the occupant freedom of
movement, locking tight only on hard braking,
hard cornering or impacts of approximately
5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also
be made to lock by pulling the belt out quickly.
13
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR05725(ALL)08/95]
*[SR05750(ALL)08/95]
Automatic locking mode
*[SR05775(ALL)08/95]
*[SR05800(ALL)08/95]
*[SR05810(ALL)08/95]
❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.
❑ Child safety seat installation.
%
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt
retractor will be automatically locked and will
remain locked when the combination
lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not
allow the occupant freedom of movement. This
mode provides the following:
RWARNING
Rear-facing infant seats should never be
placed in the front seats.
*[SR05825(ALL)09/95]
This mode must be used when installing a child
safety seat on the front passenger seat and rear
outboard seats where dual locking retractors are
provided.
*[SR05830(ALL)08/95]
To switch the retractor from the emergency
locking mode to the automatic locking mode,
perform the following steps:
*[SR05875(ALL)08/95]
*[SR05900(ALL)09/95]
1.
Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.
2.
Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and
pull downward until all of the belt is
extracted and, when allowed to retract, a
clicking sound is heard. At this time, the belt
retractor is in the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode).
*[SR05925(ALL)08/95]
3.
A clicking sound will continue to be heard
as the belt is allowed to retract. This
indicates that the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode.
14
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR05930(ALL)08/95]
NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder
belt is unbuckled and allowed to
retract completely, the retractor will
switch to the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode. See the
detailed instructions under Safety Seats
for Children in this chapter.
*[SR05940(ALL)08/95]
*[SR05950(ALL)08/95]
*[SR05960(ALL)06/95]
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
[SR05962(ALL)06/95]
To adjust the belt down, pinch the release
button. To adjust the belt up, slide the adjuster
up. (You do not have to pinch the release
button.)
*[SR05964(ALL)06/95]
Make sure the adjuster is firmly in one of the
five positions. The belt should be adjusted up or
down until the belt rests on your shoulder near
your neck.
%
Driver and right front passenger
You can adjust the shoulder belt height to one of
five (5) positions.
[SR05966(ALL)06/95]
one third page art:0001402-B
The shoulder belt height adjuster
15
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR05968(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Position the shoulder belt height adjuster
so that the belt rests across the middle of
your shoulder. Be sure the shoulder belt is
properly positioned on your shoulder each
time you use the belt. If the shoulder belt
is off your shoulder, on your upper arm
or neck, there is a greater risk of severe
injury in a collision.
[SR06000(ALL)04/95]
Safety Belts for Rear-Facing Occupants
(Wagon)
[SR06050(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Never use child safety seats in the third
seat of a wagon.
[SR06060(ALL)10/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with safety seat belts
containing an adjust tongue at the rear-facing
seating positions.
[SR06075(ALL)10/95]
When the adjust tongue of the lap/shoulder
combination seat belt is latched into the buckle,
the tongue will allow the lap portion to become
shorter, but locks the webbing in place to restrict
it from becoming longer.
[SR06125(ALL)10/95]
Before you can reach and latch a combination
lap and shoulder belt having an adjust tongue
into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
lap belt portion of it. To lengthen the lap belt,
pull some webbing out of the shoulder belt
retractor. While holding the webbing below the
tongue, grasp the tongue so that it is parallel to
the webbing and slide the tongue upward.
Provide enough lap belt length so that the
tongue can reach the buckle.
16
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR06175(ALL)10/95]
*[SR06201(ALL)07/95]
To fasten the belt, pull the combination lap and
shoulder belt from the retractor so that the
shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses
your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not
twisted. If the belt is twisted remove the twist.
Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for
your seating position until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue.
RWARNING
The lap belts should fit snugly and as low
as possible around the hips, not around
the waist.
*[SR06225(ALL)03/95]
RWARNING
All front and rear seat outboard
occupants (including pregnant women)
should wear lap and shoulder belts, for
optimum protection in a collision.
*[SR06251(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury
in a collision. 1) Use the shoulder belt on
the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing it around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for
more than one person.
*[SR06275(ALL)03/95]
Due to folding rear seats, sometimes the buckles
and tongues toward the center of the vehicle
may be hidden by the rear edge of the seat
cushion. Pull them out so they will be accessible.
17
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR06301(ALL)10/95]
While you are fastened in the seat belt, the
shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.
However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will become
locked and help reduce your forward movement.
[SR06500(ALL)03/95]
To unfasten the belt, push the red release button
on the end of the buckle. This allows the tongue
to unlatch from the buckle. While the belt
retracts, guide the tongue to its original position
to prevent it from striking you or the vehicle.
[SR06550(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0000029-F
Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts for the
rear-facing third seat (wagon)
18
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR06560(ALL)04/95]
Center Occupant Rear Safety Belt (Sedan)
[SR06565(ALL)04/95]
The safety belt in the center rear seating position
has a detachable shoulder belt.
[SR06570(ALL)04/95]
To attach the shoulder belt to the lap belt, pull
the shoulder belt out from the retractor in the
seatback and insert the lap belt connecting pin
into the wide end of the key-slot on the
shoulder belt as shown in Figure 1. Pull the
connecting pin into the narrow end of the
key-slot until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
See Figure 2. Make sure the shoulder belt is
securely fastened to the lap belt by pulling up
on the shoulder belt.
[SR06575(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0001371-B
The reverse side of the lap belt and the detachable
shoulder belt
19
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR06580(ALL)05/95]
half page art:0001372-A
The reverse side of the shoulder belt attached to the lap
belt
[SR06585(ALL)12/95]
RWARNING
The rear center lap belt must be tightened
separately from the shoulder strap. The
lap belt must fit snugly, and as low as
possible around the hips. Do not wear
around your waist. For information about
adjusting the belt, see “LAP BELTS” in
this chapter.
[SR06590(ALL)04/95]
Detach the shoulder belt before folding down
the passenger side rear seat. To detach the
shoulder belt, slide the connecting pin to the
wide end of the key-slot and lift the shoulder
belt off the connecting pin. As the shoulder belt
retracts, guide the belt so that it does not strike
you or the vehicle.
20
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
%
Lap Belts
[SR06650(ALL)10/95]
The lap belts in the center front seating position
(if equipped) and center rear seat do not adjust
automatically. You must adjust them to fit
snugly and as low as possible around your hips.
Do not wear the lap belt around your waist.
[SR06675(ALL)04/95]
The front center seat belt buckle and tongue are
stowed in a pocket between the seat cushion and
seatback. Remove them from the stowage pocket
before fastening.
*[SR06700(ALL)06/95]
Pull the belt across your hips and insert the
tongue into the correct buckle on your seat
until you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make sure
the buckle is securely fastened.
*[SR06601(ALL)05/95]
%
If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and
tip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt.
Pull the belt tongue over your lap until it
reaches the buckle.
*[SR06800(ALL)06/95]
If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose
end of the webbing until the belt fits snugly.
*[SR06750(ALL)06/95]
[SR06850(ALL)08/95]
one third page art:0000029-F
Unfastening the lap belts for the center front and center
rear seating positions
21
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR06900(ALL)08/95]
To unfasten the belt, push the release button on
the end of the buckle. This allows the tongue to
unlatch from the buckle.
*[SR06925(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
The lap belts should fit snugly and as low
as possible around the hips, not around
the waist.
*[SR07750(ALL)08/95]
*[SR07800(ALL)07/95]
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
[SR07850(ALL)02/95]
This assembly is not for use in the wagon
rear-facing seat.
%
For some people, the safety belt may be too
short even when it is fully extended. You can
add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length
with a safety belt extension assembly (part
number 611C22). Safety belt extensions are
available at no cost from your dealer.
[SR07900(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The use of the safety belt extension in the
wagon rear-facing seat will increase the
risk of personal injury.
*[SR07924(ALL)08/95]
Use only extensions manufactured by the same
supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer
identification is located at the end of the
webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt
extension only if the safety belt is too short for
you when fully extended. Do not use extension
to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
*[SR07925(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Failure to follow these instructions will
affect the performance of the safety belts
and increase the risk of personal injury.
22
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
%
*[SR07950(ALL)08/95]
*[SR07970(ALL)09/95]
Safety Belt Maintenance
Check the safety belt systems periodically to
make sure that they work properly and are not
damaged.
%
All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,
buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies
(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tether
bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after any
collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt
assemblies used in vehicles involved in a
collision be replaced. However, if the collision
was minor and a qualified technician finds that
the belts do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation
is noted.
*[SR08400(ALL)06/95]
*[SR08500(ALL)06/95]
Cleaning the Safety Belts
*[SR07980(ALL)10/95]
%
Clean the safety belts with any mild soap
solution that is recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the
belt webbing because this may weaken it.
%
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)
*[SR14650(ALL)05/95]
The driver and right front passenger air bags are
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), provided
at these seating positions in addition to the
lap/shoulder belt, and are designed to
supplement the protection provided to properly
belted occupants in moderate to severe frontal
collisions. The supplemental air bag system does
not provide restraint to the lower body.
*[SR14300(ALL)06/95]
23
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR14800(ALL)05/95]
*[SR14900(ALL)06/95]
%
The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts
RWARNING
Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle
occupants to be properly restrained and
help reduce the risk of injury in a
collision.
*[SR14950(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
All occupants of the vehicle, including the
driver, should always wear their safety
belts, even when an air bag Supplemental
Restraint System is provided.
*[SR15000(ALL)01/95]
There are four very important reasons to use
safety belts even with an air bag system. Use
your safety belts to:
*[SR15100(ALL)01/95]
❑ help keep you in the proper position (away
*[SR15200(ALL)01/95]
❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or
*[SR15300(ALL)01/95]
❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions
*[SR15400(ALL)01/95]
❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from your
*[SR15500(ALL)01/95]
*[SR15600(ALL)05/95]
The Importance of Being Properly Seated
%
from the air bag) when it inflates
rear impact collisions, because an air bag is
not designed to inflate in such situations
that are not severe enough to activate the
supplemental air bag
vehicle
In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely
fast to help provide additional protection for
you. In order to do this, the air bag must inflate
with considerable force. If you are not seated in
a normal riding position with your back against
the seatback, the air bag may not protect you
properly and could possibly hurt you as it
inflates.
24
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR16000(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
If a passenger is not properly seated and
restrained, an inflating air bag could cause
serious injury.
*[SR16050(ALL)07/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger air bag. Air bags deploy with great
force, faster than the blink of an eye. Front
passengers, especially children and small adults,
must never sit on the front edge of the seat,
stand near the glove compartment of the
instrument panel, or lean over near the air bag
cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants
should sit with their backs against the seatback,
move the seat to the most rearward position if
possible and use the safety belts. Children
weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should
use child or infant seats.
*[SR16100(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Rear-facing infant seats should never be
placed in the front seat.
*[SR16200(ALL)07/95]
In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is
closer to the air bag. The force of the rapidly
inflating air bag could push the top of the
rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback or
center armrests (if so equipped), or center
console (if so equipped). REAR-FACING
INFANT CARRIERS MUST ALWAYS BE
SECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child
safety seats and infant seats should be secured in
the rear seat whenever possible.
25
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR16250(ALL)07/95]
%
RWARNING
When using forward-facing child seats
move the passenger seat as far back from
the instrument panel as possible. NEVER
SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
IN THE FRONT SEAT.
*[SR16255(ALL)11/95]
The force of the rapidly inflating passenger air
bag could push the top of the rear-facing seat
against the vehicle seatback, armrests or console.
Rear-facing infant seats must always be secured
in the rear seat.
*[SR16300(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Do not place objects or mount equipment
on or near the air bag cover on the
steering wheel or in front seat areas that
may come in contact with a deploying air
bag. Failure to follow this instruction may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a collision.
*[SR16350(ALL)07/95]
For further information about the proper
mounting of equipment in the front seat of this
vehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitled
Some Important Information About Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System which can be
obtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.
Ask for brochure FPS-8602.
*[SR16400(ALL)08/95]
For additional important safety information on
the proper use of seat belts, child seats, and
infant seats, please read the other sections of this
chapter of the Owner Guide, especially sections
entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats
for Children.
26
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
%
How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint
System Operates
*[SR16600(ALL)06/95]
The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System
consists of the driver and passenger air bags,
impact sensors, a system diagnostic module, a
readiness light and tone, and the electrical
wiring which connects the components.
*[SR16750(ALL)06/95]
The driver air bag is in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger seat air bag is
located in the center of the instrument panel
ledge above the glove compartment. Both air
bags are designed to stay out of sight until they
are activated.
*[SR16500(ALL)01/95]
[SR16775(ALL)11/94]
half page art:0001373-A
The location of air bags and warning labels
27
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR17400(ALL)07/95]
If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the
severity of the impact and activate the air bags if
necessary. The air bag system is designed to
deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions
more severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of
similar size and weight) head-on at about
28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses
the crash severity rather than vehicle speed,
some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph
(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.
[SR17500(ALL)12/95]
When the sensors activate the system, the air
bags inflate rapidly, filling with non-toxic gas
mixture in a fraction of a second. Immediately
after inflation, the air bags deflate by releasing
the gas mixture through vent holes. The whole
process takes place in a matter of seconds.
*[SR17580(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after
inflation.
28
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR17710(ALL)08/95]
half page art:0011063-A
Inflated driver-side air bag
[SR17730(ALL)09/95]
half page art:0011064-A
Inflated passenger-side air bag
29
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR18400(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG
WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND
MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If
the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
*[SR18425(ALL)07/95]
To ensure that the air bag system will operate as
intended in a crash, the system is equipped with
a diagnostic module, which controls a readiness
lamp and a warning tone. The diagnostic
module monitors its own circuits, the air bag
electrical system, the air bag readiness light, the
air bag power, and the air bag inflators.
*[SR18450(ALL)05/95]
The air bag system uses a readiness light on the
instrument cluster and a tone to indicate the
condition of the system. When you turn the
ignition key to the ON position, this light will
illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and
then turn off. This indicates that the system is
operating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of the
air bag system is not required.
%
*[SR18475(ALL)06/95]
A problem with the system is indicated by one
or more of the following:
*[SR18501(ALL)06/95]
*[SR18525(ALL)06/95]
❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,
❑ or it will not light immediately after ignition
*[SR18550(ALL)06/95]
❑ or a group of five beeps will be heard. The
*[SR18575(ALL)08/95]
If any of these things happen, have the air bag
system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bag
Supplemental Restraint System may not function
properly in the event of a collision.
%
is turned on,
tone pattern will repeat periodically until the
problem and light are repaired.
30
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR18601(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the Air Bag Supplemental
Restraint System or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
%
Disposal of air bags or air bag equipped
vehicles
*[SR19500(ALL)06/95]
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped
vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
*[SR20200(ALL)05/95]
*[SR20300(ALL)02/95]
Safety Restraints for Children
*[SR19000(ALL)05/95]
%
*[SR20400(ALL)08/95]
In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law
to use safety restraints for children. If small
children ride in your vehicle — this generally
includes children who are four years old or
younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or
less — you must put them in safety seats that
are made specially for children. Safety belts
alone do not provide maximum protection for
these children. Check your local and state laws
for specific requirements.
RWARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his
or her lap while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision.
*[SR20500(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
To prevent the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
31
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR20600(ALL)10/95]
RWARNING
Passengers should not be allowed to ride
in the cargo area. Persons not riding in a
seat with a fastened seat belt are much
more likely to suffer serious injury in a
collision. Cargo should always be secured
to prevent it from shifting and causing
damage to the vehicle or harm to
passengers.
*[SR20650(ALL)06/95]
When possible, put children in the rear seat of
your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
*[SR20700(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.
*[SR20900(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
*[SR21000(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Never leave a child unattended in your
vehicle.
32
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR22000(ALL)01/95]
*[SR22100(ALL)05/95]
Safety Seats for Children
*[SR22125(ALL)08/95]
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat
having a top tether strap. Install the child safety
seat in a seating position which is capable of
providing a tether anchorage. For more
information on top tether straps see Attaching
Safety Seats With Tether Straps in this chapter.
*[SR22150(ALL)08/95]
When installing a child safety seat, be sure to
use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating
position, and make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap belt
combination with a sliding tongue, make sure
the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
*[SR22375(ALL)07/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger air bag. Air bags deploy with great
force, faster than the blink of an eye. Front
passengers, especially children and small adults,
must never sit on the front edge of the seat,
stand near the glove compartment of the
instrument panel, or lean over near the air bag
cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants
should sit with their backs against the seatback,
move the seat to the most rearward position if
possible and use the safety belts. Children
weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should
use child or infant seats.
%
*[SR22400(ALL)07/95]
%
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the
size and weight of the child. Always follow the
safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when
installing and using the safety seat.
RWARNING
When using forward-facing child seats
move the passenger seat as far back from
the instrument panel as possible. NEVER
SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
IN THE FRONT SEAT.
33
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR22420(ALL)11/95]
The force of the rapidly inflating passenger air
bag could push the top of the rear-facing seat
against the vehicle seatback, armrests or console.
Rear-facing infant seats must always be secured
in the rear seat.
*[SR22450(ALL)07/95]
All child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the
lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
*[SR22500(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
If you do not properly secure the safety
seat, the child occupying the seat may be
injured during a collision or sudden stop.
An unsecured safety seat could also injure
other passengers.
*[SR22600(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.
[SR22700(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Never use child safety seats in the third
seat of a wagon.
*[SR22720(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Always keep the buckle release button
pointing upward and away from the child
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button as shown in
the following illustration.
34
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR22740(ALL)11/94]
half page art:0011286-A
Safety belt buckle placement for child seats
%
Installing Child Safety Seats in the Front
Passenger Seat and Outer Rear Seating
Positions
*[SR22800(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking
mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the
front passenger seat and rear outer seats. The
automatic locking mode must be used when
installing a child seat or infant carrier in the
front passenger seat or rear outer seats.
*[SR22850(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
*[SR22750(ALL)11/94]
Never install a rear-facing child seat or
infant carrier in the right front passenger
seat.
35
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR22901(ALL)03/95]
If you choose to install a child safety seat in the
front seating position, move vehicle seat as far
back as possible.
*[SR22950(ALL)12/94]
1.
Position the child seat on the passenger seat
of the vehicle.
*[SR23001(ALL)09/95]
2.
Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp
shoulder belt and lap belt together. See
Figure 1.
*[SR23050(ALL)09/95]
half page art:0011238-B
Pulling out belt webbing
36
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR23100(ALL)08/95]
3.
While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue through
the child seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be
sure that the belt webbing is not twisted.
*[SR23150(ALL)06/95]
half page art:0011239-B
Routing the lap/shoulder belt
37
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR23200(ALL)06/95]
half page art:0011240-B
Buckling the belt
38
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR23250(ALL)08/95]
4.
Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and
pull downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard. At this time,
the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child seat restraint mode).
See Figure 4.
*[SR23301(ALL)06/95]
half page art:0011241-A
Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode
*[SR23350(ALL)07/95]
5.
Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be
heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
Push down on the child seat while you pull
up on the belt to remove any slack in the
belt. Figures 5 and 6.
39
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR23401(ALL)09/95]
half page art:0011242-A
Allowing shoulder belt to retract
*[SR23450(ALL)09/95]
half page art:0011243-A
Removing slack from belt
40
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR23501(ALL)07/95]
6.
Before placing the child in the child seat,
forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and
tug it forward to make sure that the seat is
securely held in place, Figure 7.
*[SR23550(ALL)06/95]
half page art:0011244-A
Checking that the seat is secure
41
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR23601(ALL)11/94]
7.
Double check that the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. Try to pull more
belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the
belt is in the automatic locking mode,
Figure 8.
*[SR23650(ALL)06/95]
half page art:0011245-B
Checking the retractor
*[SR23701(ALL)05/95]
8.
*[SR23750(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: To remove the retractor from automatic
lock mode, allow seat belt to retract
fully to its stowed position and the
retractor will automatically switch back
to the vehicle sensitive locking mode
for normal adult usage.
42
Check to make sure that the child seat is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat steps 4
through 7.
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR24750(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.
*[SR24800(ALL)06/95]
*[SR24950(ALL)06/95]
Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps
*[SR25050(ALL)08/95]
*[SR25150(ALL)08/95]
Front Seats
*[SR25250(ALL)08/95]
1.
Buckle the lap/shoulder belt (in the seat
directly behind the front passenger seat in
which the child safety seat will be installed).
*[SR25350(ALL)07/95]
2.
Pull all the stored belt out of the rear seat
retractor to switch the retractor to automatic
locking mode.
*[SR25375(ALL)08/95]
3.
Let the retractor wind up the slack from the
lap/shoulder belt.
*[SR25425(ALL)08/95]
4.
Install the child safety seat in the front seat.
Refer to the previous section on Installing
Safety Seats. Hook the tether strap hook
around the webbing near the center of the
shoulder portion of the locked lap/shoulder
belt.
*[SR25525(ALL)08/95]
5.
Tighten the tether strap.
%
Some manufacturers make safety seats that
include a tether strap that goes over the back of
the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring
point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap
as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of
your child safety seat for information about
ordering a tether strap.
To install a tether from a child safety seat in the
front seat:
43
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR25550(ALL)07/95]
*[SR25600(ALL)07/95]
Rear Seats
*[SR25725(ALL)06/95]
Tether anchorage hardware
[SR25800(ALL)06/95]
Attachment holes (at each rear outboard seating
position) have been provided in your vehicle to
attach anchor hardware, if required. Kits can be
obtained at no charge from any Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[SR26100(ALL)06/95]
Be sure to follow the child safety seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
If you use a tethered safety seat on one of the
rear seats, you can anchor the strap to the
appropriate tether anchor directly behind that
seat position.
*[SR26500(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Tighten the anchor according to
specifications. Otherwise, the safety seat
may not be properly secured and the child
may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
[SR26600(ALL)04/95]
In a station wagon, you simply attach the tether
strap to one of the anchors that are already
installed for you.
*[SR26615(ALL)06/95]
Tether anchorage hardware
[SR26630(ALL)04/95]
All wagons have a tether anchor installed for
each of the second row seating positions.
44
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR26700(ALL)04/95]
two third page art:0000041-C
Finding the tether anchors in the wagon
[SR26750(ALL)04/95]
1.
Behind the second seat, find the plastic
snap-on covers for the floor anchors.
*[SR26801(ALL)04/95]
2.
Use a screwdriver or coin to snap the covers
off the anchor in a rearward and upward
direction. Remove the covers completely.
[SR26850(ALL)04/95]
3.
Snap the tether strap hook onto the
U-shaped tether anchor.
45
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR26900(ALL)04/95]
Built-In Child Seat (Wagon — If equipped)
[SR26950(ALL)04/95]
The second row seat may include an optional
built-in child safety seat on the passenger side.
The child restraint is to be used only by children
who are at least one year old, weigh between 9
and 27 kilograms (20 and 60 pounds) and whose
shoulders (top) are below the shoulder harness
slots in the seatback.
*[SR27000(ALL)08/95]
If your child is less than one year old or weighs
less than 9 kilograms (20 pounds), always use a
rear facing infant or convertible seat because a
child of that size is not sufficiently developed to
withstand crash forces in a front facing position.
Follow the specific manufacturer’s instructions
for weight and height restrictions.
*[SR27051(ALL)08/95]
Children must be properly buckled before riding
in the vehicle. It is the law in every state and
province. This child seat conforms to all
Federal/Canadian motor vehicle safety
standards.
*[SR27100(ALL)08/95]
*[SR27150(ALL)08/95]
Built-in child seat belt retractors
[SR27251(ALL)12/95]
The retractor will automatically snug the belts
around the child. Frequently check the child
seat’s lap and shoulder harness belts for correct
placement and tightness. Use the child seat only
if the harness belts will stay snug with a child
buckled in the seat. If belts do not remain snug,
take the vehicle to the dealer for child seat
repair.
The belts on the built-in child seat are equipped
with a retractor that locks when both belt
tongues are latched into the crotch safety belt
buckle.
46
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR27300(ALL)12/95]
RWARNING
Always adjust the lap and shoulder
harness belts provided with this child seat
snugly around your child.
*[SR27351(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Never leave a child unattended in your
vehicle.
*[SR27400(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
*[SR27451(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Failure to follow all of the instructions on
the use of this child restraint system can
result in your child striking the vehicle’s
interior during a sudden stop or crash.
*[SR27500(ALL)08/95]
*[SR27551(ALL)05/95]
*[SR27600(ALL)08/95]
How to use the Built-In Child Seat
Read the following procedures and all of the
labels on the Built-In Child Seat before using the
seat.
RWARNING
Never use the Built-In Child Seat as a
booster cushion with the adult safety
belts. A child using the adult belts could
slide forward and out from under the
safety belts.
47
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR27605(ALL)12/95]
1.
Pull and release flap from top of seatback.
See Figure 1.
[SR27620(ALL)12/95]
NOTE: The child seat cannot be opened unless
the seatback is latched in the upright
position.
[SR27630(ALL)12/95]
one third page art:0001500-A
Figure 1: Releasing the flap
[SR27651(ALL)12/95]
2.
Grasp the child seat at the top of the
seatback and pull the top forward to release
the latch. See Figure 2.
[SR27770(ALL)12/95]
one third page art:0001452-B
Figure 2: Releasing the latch
48
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR27780(ALL)12/95]
3.
Continue to unfold the child seat until it
rests on the seat as shown in Figure 3.
[SR27801(ALL)12/95]
one third page art:0001453-B
Figure 3: Opening the built-in child seat
[SR27850(ALL)12/95]
4.
Read the information and warnings on the
child seat cushion and shoulder safety belt.
Refer to Figure 4. Check the child’s size,
weight and age to be sure the child is not
too small or too large for the child seat.
[SR27900(ALL)12/95]
one third page art:0001454-B
Figure 4: Child seat information and warnings
49
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR28000(ALL)12/95]
5.
If connected, squeeze the top and the bottom
of the right half of the chest clip and pull to
separate both halves.
[SR28100(ALL)12/95]
6.
Place the child on the child seat and position
the shoulder belts over each shoulder. Refer
to Figure 5.
[SR28125(ALL)12/95]
one third page art:0001456-B
Figure 5: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child
[SR28150(ALL)12/95]
NOTE: Read the following steps carefully to
become familiar with the indicator
windows located on each safety belt
tongue and the chest clip. When either
of the tongues or the chest clip is
unbuckled, the color red appears in the
window. When the tongues or chest
clip are securely buckled, the color
green appears.
50
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR28200(ALL)12/95]
7.
[SR28220(ALL)12/95]
NOTE: The indicator window on each tongue
must appear green when buckled.
[SR28240(ALL)12/95]
NOTE: If a belt locks during extraction, allow
belts to retract FULLY and repeat
procedure.
*[SR28250(ALL)08/95]
Insert either the left or right safety belt
tongue into the single opening of the crotch
safety belt buckle as shown in Figure 6. (It
does not matter which tongue is inserted
first.) Then insert the other tongue. Allow
belts to retract and fit snugly.
RWARNING
If both tongues do not latch in the buckle,
do not use the child seat. See your dealer
for repairs.
51
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR28300(ALL)12/95]
three fourths page art:0
Figure 6: Fastening the crotch safety belt buckle
52
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR28450(ALL)12/95]
8.
Fasten both halves of the chest clip below
the child’s shoulders and adjust it to
comfortably hold the shoulder belts in place
on the child’s chest. The color green must
appear in the indicator window when
fastened. (The purpose of this clip is to
position the shoulder belts correctly on the
child’s shoulders. The clip can be easily
pulled apart and is designed to pull apart
during a collision. The clip helps keep the
belts on the shoulders of a sleeping or
squirming child.) Refer to Figure 7.
53
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR28500(ALL)12/95]
three fourths page art:0
Figure 7: Securing the chest clip
54
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
[SR28550(ALL)12/95]
9.
Pull the shoulder belts out to ensure that the
crotch safety belt buckle is securely fastened
and the retractor is locked. Refer to Figure 8.
[SR28575(ALL)12/95]
half page art:0001455-B
Figure 8: Checking for securely latched buckle and locked
retractor
[SR28600(ALL)12/95]
10. If the belts become too tight, unbuckle the
crotch safety belt buckle, allow belts to
retract, then reinsert both belt tongues.
*[SR28650(ALL)08/95]
To remove the child from the built-in child
seat:
[SR28700(ALL)12/95]
1.
Squeeze the tabs on the top and bottom of
the chest clip and pull the halves apart to
open the chest clip. Refer back to Figure 7.
*[SR28750(ALL)08/95]
2.
Press the release button on the crotch safety
belt buckle.
[SR28800(ALL)12/95]
3.
Slide the shoulder belts off the child’s
shoulders and remove the child. Refer back
to Figure 5.
55
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR28850(ALL)08/95]
To stow the built-in child seat:
[SR28900(ALL)08/95]
1.
Return the child seat cushion to the upright
position.
[SR28950(ALL)08/95]
2.
Press firmly in the center and top of the
child seat to place it in the stowed position.
[SR28960(ALL)12/95]
3.
Reattach the flap on the child seat to the top
of the seatback.
[SR29000(ALL)03/95]
The seat can now be used by an adult or the
seatback can be folded down.
[SR29025(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The seatback cannot be folded down
unless the child seat is fully stowed.
*[SR29050(ALL)08/95]
Inspection after a collision
[SR29100(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
All built-in child restraints, including
seats, buckles, retractors, seat latches,
interlocks, and attaching hardware should
be inspected by a qualified Dealer
technician after any collision. If the child
seat was in use during a collision, Ford
recommends replacing it. However, if the
collision was minor and a qualified
technician finds that the child restraints
do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Built-in child seats not in use
during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.
56
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR29150(ALL)08/95]
*[SR29200(ALL)08/95]
Built-in child seat maintenance
Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder belts
system of your child seat. See your Ford dealer
if the shoulder belt webbing is frayed, or if the
buckle and tongue are damaged and/or do not
function properly.
%
Cleaning
[SR29300(ALL)08/95]
Your built-in child seat may be cleaned with
mild soap and water. Do not use household
cleaners as they may weaken the webbing or
damage the plastic parts. For your convenience,
the liner is removable and can be
machine-washed and air-dried.
*[SR29500(ALL)07/95]
*[SR29600(ALL)07/95]
Safety Belts for Children
*[SR29250(ALL)08/95]
%
*[SR29700(ALL)07/95]
Children who are too large for child safety seats
should always wear safety belts. (See instructions
with your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,
to determine maximum size of child that will
safely fit in the seat.)
RWARNING
If safety belts are not properly worn and
adjusted as described, the risk of serious
injury to the child in a collision will be
much greater.
*[SR29800(ALL)12/95]
If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and
shoulder belts can be positioned so that it does
not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder
belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the
vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
57
File:03fcsrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996
*[SR29900(ALL)07/95]
To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on
children who have outgrown child safety seats,
Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all
Federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and
provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that
encourages safer seating posture and better fit of
lap and shoulder belts on the child. A
belt-positioning booster should be used if the
shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or
neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on
both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let
the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion
when the lower legs hang over the edge of the
seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the
specific needs of your child with your
pediatrician.
*[SR30000(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Do not use a belt-positioning booster with
a lap-only belt.
*[SR30100(ALL)07/95]
Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and
shoulder belts should always be worn snugly
and below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.
*[SR30200(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, children should always ride with
the seatback upright.
58
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
Starting Your Taurus
*[ST03300(ALL)03/95]
% [ST03400(ALL)01/95]
*
Ignition
Understanding the Positions of the Ignition
[ST03725(ALL)11/94]
quarter page art:0000017-D
The positions of the key in the ignition
%
ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s
electrical accessories such as the radio and the
windshield wipers to operate while the engine is
not running.
% [ST04100(ALL)10/89]
LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks the
gearshift for all vehicles with an automatic
transaxle.
*[ST04175(ALL)08/95]
The automatic transaxle gearshift must be in P
(Park) to move the key to the LOCK position.
*[ST04200(ALL)01/95]
LOCK is the only position that allows you to
remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to
protect your vehicle from theft.
*[ST04050(ALL)07/95]
%
If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, move
the steering wheel left or right until the key
turns freely.
[ST04325(ALL)04/95]
OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all
accessories without locking the steering wheel or
the automatic transaxle gearshift lever.
*[ST04300(ALL)05/95]
59
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
*[ST04350(ALL)05/95]
ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning
lights (except the brake system warning light) to
make sure they work before you start the
engine. The key returns to the ON position once
the engine is started and remains in this position
while the engine runs.
*[ST04375(ALL)03/95]
START cranks the engine. Release the key once
the engine starts so that you do not damage the
starter. The key should return to ON when you
release it. The START position also allows you
to test the brake warning light.
%
Removing the Key From the Ignition
[ST06000(ALL)02/95]
Procedures for removing the key from the
ignition will be the same for both the columnand console-mounted gearshifts.
*[ST06300(ALL)06/95]
*[ST06400(ALL)01/95]
1.
Put the gearshift in P (Park).
2.
Set the parking brake fully.
[ST06500(ALL)11/94]
3.
Turn the ignition to the LOCK position.
*[ST06600(ALL)03/95]
4.
Remove the key.
[ST07310(ALL)05/95]
If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate
the steering wheel slightly because it may be
binding.
*[ST04500(ALL)02/95]
*[ST07520(ALL)05/95]
%
If the driver’s door is open while the key is still
in the ignition, a warning chime sounds.
*[ST07525(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the gearshift is securely latched
in P (Park).
60
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
*[ST07575(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Do not leave children, unreliable adults,
or pets alone in your vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or others
through inadvertent operation of the
vehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe and possibly fatal injuries to
people as well as animals.
*[ST08200(ALL)03/95]
% [ST08300(ALL)05/94]
*
*[ST08350(ALL)09/95]
Starting Your Vehicle
Preparing to Start Your Vehicle
RWARNING
Do not start your vehicle in a closed
garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in
a stopped vehicle for more than a short
period of time with the engine running.
Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding
Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for
more instructions.
*[ST08400(ALL)01/95]
*[ST08500(ALL)08/95]
Before you start your vehicle, do the following:
1.
Make sure all occupants in the vehicle
buckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraints
in the Index for more details.
*[ST08600(ALL)03/95]
2.
Make sure your headlamps and other
accessories are turned off and the parking
brake is set.
[ST08850(ALL)11/94]
3.
Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park)
before you turn the key.
*[ST09150(ALL)03/95]
Before you start your vehicle, you should test
the warning lights on the instrument panel to
make sure that they work. Refer to the Warning
Lights and Gauges chapter.
61
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
*[ST09310(ALL)02/95]
*[ST09320(ALL)06/95]
*[ST09330(ALL)05/95]
Starting Your Engine
1.
Follow the steps under Preparing to Start
Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section.
*[ST09340(ALL)03/95]
*[ST09350(ALL)06/95]
2.
Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3.
DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when
starting your engine. DO NOT use the
accelerator while the vehicle is parked.
*[ST09360(ALL)02/95]
4.
Turn the key to the START position
(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the
key to return to the ON position after the
engine has started.
%
To start your engine:
If you have difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel slightly because it
may be binding.
*[ST09370(ALL)02/95]
*[ST09375(ALL)04/95]
*[ST09381(ALL)06/95]
For a cold engine:
*[ST09385(ALL)04/95]
❑ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the
*[ST09387(ALL)05/95]
*[ST09390(ALL)04/95]
For a warm engine:
%
%
❑ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If
the engine does not start in fifteen (15)
seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,
wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you
do not flood the engine, then try again.
engine does not start in five (5) seconds on
the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait
approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not
flood the engine, then try again.
❑ Do not hold the key in the START position
for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If
the engine does not start within five (5)
seconds on the first try, turn the key to the
OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the
starter stops, then try again.
62
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
*[ST09400(ALL)08/95]
Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key
as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
*[ST09410(ALL)05/95]
After you start the engine, let it idle for a few
seconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and
put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the
parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal
and drive away in the normal manner.
[ST09420(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle and has an
interlock that prevents you from
shifting out of P (Park) unless your
foot is on the brake pedal.
*[ST09480(ALL)04/95]
*[ST09492(ALL)04/95]
*[ST09494(ALL)04/95]
If the engine does not start after two attempts:
%
1.
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
2.
Press the accelerator all the way to the floor
and hold it.
*[ST09496(ALL)04/95]
*[ST09497(ALL)04/95]
3.
Turn the ignition key to the START position.
4.
Release the ignition key when the engine
starts.
*[ST09498(ALL)04/95]
5.
Release the accelerator gradually as the
engine speeds up. Then drive away in the
normal manner.
*[ST09500(ALL)04/95]
If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been triggered. For
directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel
Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.
[ST10200(ALL)12/95]
A computer system controls the engine’s idle
speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s
idle speed normally runs high. These faster
engine speeds will make your vehicle coast
slightly faster than its normal idle speed. It
should, however, slow down after a short time.
If it does not, have the idle speed checked by
your dealer or a qualified technician.
63
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
*[ST10250(ALL)07/95]
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle
checked.
*[ST10325(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Extended idling at high engine speeds can
produce very high temperatures in the
engine and exhaust system, creating the
risk of fire or other damage.
*[ST10350(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The
emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which
can start a fire.
*[ST10500(ALL)03/95]
If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero
temperatures, use an engine block heater (if
your vehicle has this option).
*[ST10600(ALL)06/95]
*[ST10700(ALL)03/95]
Engine Block Heater (If equipped)
*[ST10900(ALL)02/95]
To turn the heater on, simply plug it into a
grounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends that
you use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by a
ground fault circuit interrupter.
%
Engine block heaters are strongly recommended
if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heater
warms the engine coolant, which improves
starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows
the heater-defrost system to respond quickly.
64
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
*[ST11000(ALL)03/95]
For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before you start your vehicle. Using the
heater for longer than three hours will not
damage the engine, so you can plug it in at
night to start your vehicle the following
morning.
*[ST11100(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To prevent electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.
%
If the Engine Cranks but Does
Not Start or Does Not Start After
a Collision
*[ST11300(ALL)11/95]
*[ST11400(ALL)11/95]
Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch
[ST11500(ALL)10/95]
Once the shut-off switch is activated, you must
reset the switch by hand before you can start
your vehicle. If you have a sedan, the switch is
on the right side of the trunk behind the trunk
liner. If you have a wagon, it is behind the
service panel on the right side of the cargo area.
*[ST11200(ALL)03/95]
%
If the engine cranks but does not start or does
not start even after a small collision, the fuel
pump shut-off switch may have been activated.
The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop
the fuel pump when your vehicle has been
involved in a substantial jolt.
65
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
[ST11600(ALL)11/94]
half page art:0000399-E
The right side of the trunk in the sedan
[ST11700(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000516-E
Inside the right side service panel in the wagon
*[ST11800(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the
switch or try to start your vehicle. Have
all the passengers get out of the vehicle
and call the local fire department or a
towing service.
66
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
*[ST11900(ALL)03/95]
If your engine cranks but does not start after a
collision or substantial jolt:
*[ST11950(ALL)04/95]
*[ST12000(ALL)03/95]
*[ST12050(ALL)01/95]
1.
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
2.
Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.
3.
If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red
reset button on the fuel pump shut-off
switch down.
*[ST12100(ALL)03/95]
4.
Turn the ignition key to the ON position for
a few seconds, then turn it to the OFF
position.
*[ST12150(ALL)03/95]
5.
Check under the vehicle again for leaking
fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start
your vehicle again. If you do not see or
smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle
again.
*[ST12200(ALL)03/95]
6.
Check all vehicle warning lights before
driving the vehicle.
*[ST12225(ALL)01/95]
*[ST12250(ALL)09/95]
Pushing
Vehicles with automatic transaxles cannot be
started by pushing. Follow the directions under
If Your Vehicle Needs a Jump-Start in the Roadside
Emergencies Chapter.
67
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
%
*[ST12300(ALL)05/95]
*[ST12400(ALL)02/95]
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
Carbon monoxide, although colorless and
odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
*[ST12500(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Do not start your vehicle in a closed
garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in
a stopped vehicle for more than a short
period of time with the engine running.
Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding
Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for
more instructions.
*[ST12600(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
*[ST12700(ALL)01/95]
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems
checked whenever:
*[ST12800(ALL)02/95]
*[ST12900(ALL)02/95]
*[ST13000(ALL)01/95]
❑ your vehicle is raised for service
❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes
❑ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision
68
File:04fcstt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996
*[ST13200(ALL)01/95]
Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet
vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.
*[ST13300(ALL)08/95]
If the engine is idling while you are stopped in
an open area for long periods of time, open the
windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjust
the heating or air conditioning system to bring
in outside air.
[ST13600(ALL)03/95]
❑ If you use the heater, set the fan speed on
either medium or HI with the select knob on
either R (floor) or VENT.
[ST13900(ALL)03/95]
❑ If you use the air conditioner, set the fan
speed on either medium or HI with the select
knob on A/C. (Do not use MAX A/C.)
[ST14000(ALL)03/95]
❑ If you use the automatic temperature control,
set the fan speed on medium or high and
press the S (panel and floor) or R (floor)
manual override button. (Do not use AUTO
or MAX A/C.)
69
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
Warning Lights and
Gauges
%
In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges
are grouped together on the instrument panel.
We call this grouping a cluster. Your vehicle has
one of the following clusters:
[LG00800(ALL)02/95]
❑ Standard cluster
❑ Optional cluster
❑ SHO cluster
*[LG00500(ALL)05/92]
[LG00900(ALL)02/95]
[LG00950( T)02/95]
*[LG01100(ALL)05/94]
If you are not sure which cluster your vehicle
has, check the diagrams on the following pages.
% [LG02050(ALL)05/95]
The Standard Cluster
[LG02075(ALL)02/95]
The following warning lights and gauges are on
the standard cluster. All of the warning lights
and gauges alert you to possible problems with
your vehicle. Some of the lights listed are
optional. The following sections detail what each
of these indicators means.
71
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG02101(ALL)03/95]
full page art:0000663-H
The standard cluster
72
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
Indicator Lights and Chimes
*[LG02400(ALL)01/95]
% [LG02500(ALL)07/95]
*
*[LG02510(ALL)09/95]
Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
[LG02550(ALL)12/95]
❑ If the driver’s safety belt is not buckled when
This warning light and chime remind you to
fasten your safety belt. The following conditions
will take place:
the key is turned to the ON position, the
light will activate for 1 to 2 minutes and the
chime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds.
*[LG02600(ALL)03/95]
❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled while the
[LG02650(ALL)12/95]
❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled before the
light is on or the chime is sounding, both the
light and the chime will turn off.
key is turned to the ON position, the light
will briefly activate, then shut off and the
chime will not activate.
[LG02700(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0000107-B
Safety belt warning light
*[LG02900(ALL)06/95]
*[LG03000(ALL)03/95]
%
Brake System Warning Light
The warning light for the brakes can show two
things — that the parking brake is not fully
released, or that the brake fluid level is low in
the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is
low, the brake system should be checked by
your dealer or a qualified service technician.
73
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG03300(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0000108-D
Brake system warning light
*[LG03500(ALL)01/95]
This light comes on when the parking brake is
set, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition to the START position. It
normally goes off shortly after the engine starts
and you release the parking brake. If the light
stays on after you have fully released the
parking brake, have the hydraulic brake system
serviced by your dealer or a qualified service
technician.
*[LG03700(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes
may not be working properly. Have the
brakes checked immediately.
*[LG03800(ALL)01/95]
*[LG03900(ALL)03/95]
%
Charging System Light
This light, shown as a battery symbol on your
cluster, indicates that your battery is not being
charged and that you need to have the electrical
system checked.
[LG04000(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0000278-B
Charging system light
74
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
*[LG04300(ALL)11/94]
This light comes on every time you turn your
ignition key to the ON or START position. The
light should go off when the engine starts and
the alternator begins to charge.
*[LG04400(ALL)01/95]
If the light stays on or comes on when the
engine is running, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible.
%
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
[LG04900(ALL)02/95]
This light indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not
the oil level. However, if the engine’s oil level is
low, it could affect the oil pressure. The light
should come on every time the ignition key is
turned to the ON or START position, and
should turn off after the engine is running.
*[LG04800(ALL)02/95]
[LG04950(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0001025-B
Engine oil pressure warning light
[LG05100(ALL)11/94]
If the light stays on or turns on when the engine
is running, the engine has lost oil pressure and
continued operation will cause severe engine
damage.
*[LG05105(ALL)03/95]
*[LG05200(ALL)03/95]
*[LG05300(ALL)11/94]
If you lose engine oil pressure:
1.
Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
2.
Shut off the engine immediately. If you do
not stop the engine as soon as safely
possible, severe engine damage could result.
75
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
*[LG05400(ALL)10/95]
3.
Check the engine’s oil level, following the
instructions on checking and adding engine
oil in this Owner Guide. (See Engine oil in
the Index.) If you do not follow these
instructions, engine damage could result. To
ensure an accurate reading, your vehicle
should be on level ground.
*[LG05500(ALL)11/94]
4.
If the level is low, add only as much oil as
necessary to bring it to the full level before
you start the engine again. Do not overfill.
Do not operate the engine if the light is on,
regardless of the oil level. Contact your
nearest dealer for further service actions.
*[LG06200(ALL)01/95]
*[LG06300(ALL)03/95]
High Beam Light
[LG06350(ALL)02/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with Daylight
Running Lamps (DRL), the high beam light will
not come on when you flash the lights.
%
This light comes on when the headlamps are
turned to high beam or when you flash the
lights.
[LG06400(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0000111-B
High beam light
76
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
%
Door Ajar Light and Chime
[LG06800(ALL)03/95]
This light comes on and a single chime sounds if
one of the doors or the liftgate or liftgate
window (wagon) is not completely shut and the
ignition is in the ON position.
*[LG06500(ALL)03/95]
[LG06850(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0000113-B
Door ajar light
*[LG07000(ALL)05/95]
*[LG07100(ALL)07/95]
Chime for Headlamps On
[LG07200(ALL)03/95]
A 3-second chime sounds after a 20-second delay
if the ignition has been turned to the OFF
position, the parking lamps or headlamps are
on, and no door has been opened.
*[LG07400(ALL)01/95]
*[LG07620(ALL)05/95]
Air Bag Readiness Light
%
%
*[LG07640(ALL)05/95]
This chime sounds if the driver or any passenger
door is open when the parking lamps or
headlamps are on. The chime sounds until you
close the door, turn off the lamps or turn the
ignition to the ON position.
A problem with the system is indicated by one
or more of the following: the readiness light will
either flash or stay lit, or it will not light, or a
group of five beeps will be heard.
RWARNING
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the air bag system
serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.
77
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG07650(ALL)11/94]
one inch art:0000653-C
Air bag readiness light
*[LG07700(ALL)11/94]
*[LG07750(ALL)03/95]
Service Engine Soon Warning Light
*[LG07775(ALL)05/95]
Modification or additions to the vehicle may
cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.
Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular
phones, and CB radios must be carefully
installed. Do not install these devices by tapping
into or running wires close to powertrain control
system wires or components.
%
The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)
system consists of the hardware and software
necessary to monitor the operation of the
powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to
check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain
control system during normal operation. If an
emission problem is detected, the Service Engine
Soon light (in the cluster) is turned on.
[LG07800(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0000282-B
Service engine soon light
78
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG07825(ALL)03/95]
This light comes on when you turn the ignition
key to ON, but should turn off when the engine
starts. If the light does not come on when you
turn the ignition to ON or if it comes on and
stays on when you are driving, have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This
indicates a possible problem with one of the
vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
[LG07851(ALL)10/95]
If the light turns on and off at one (1) second
intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it
means that the engine is misfiring. If this
condition persists, damage could occur to the
engine or catalytic converter. Avoid heavy
acceleration and have your vehicle serviced at
the first opportunity. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed in.
*[LG07875(ALL)05/95]
If the light turns on and off on rare occasions
while you are driving, it means that a
malfunction occurred and the condition corrected
itself.
[LG07900(ALL)03/95]
An example of a condition which corrects itself
occurs when an engine running out of fuel
begins to misfire. In this case, the Service Engine
Soon Warning Light may turn on and will then
set a Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the
engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel
was being consumed. After refueling, the Service
Engine Soon Warning Light will turn off after
the vehicle has completed three consecutive
warm up cycles without a misfire condition
occurring. A warm up cycle consists of engine
start from a cold condition (engine at ambient
temperature) and running until the engine
reaches normal operating temperature.
79
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG07925(ALL)03/95]
On the fourth engine start up, the Service
Engine Soon Warning Light will turn off as soon
as the engine begins to crank. It is not necessary
to have the engine serviced.
[LG07951(ALL)11/94]
Under certain conditions, the Service Engine
Soon light may come on if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. If the Service Engine Soon
light comes on and you suspect that the fuel cap
is not properly installed, pull off the road as
soon as it is safely possible and turn off the
engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap, making
sure it is properly seated.
[LG08001(ALL)02/95]
After completing the three consecutive warm up
cycles and on the fourth engine start up, the
Service Engine Soon warning light should turn
off. If the light does not go off after the fourth
engine restart, have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer or a qualified technician.
% [LG08010(ALL)12/95]
Low Fuel Light
[LG08015(ALL)12/95]
This light comes on when your fuel gauge
indicates approximately 1/16 of a tank. The
ignition must be turned to the ON position for
this light to come on. This light will glow
steadily.
% [LG08020(ALL)12/95]
one inch art:0000116-C
Low fuel light
80
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
*[LG08051(ALL)05/95]
*[LG08102(ALL)09/95]
%
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate the
direction in which you are going to be turning.
*[LG08150(ALL)07/95]
one inch art:0010525-A
% [LG08251(ALL)11/94]
Cruise Control Indicator Light
(If equipped)
[LG08301(ALL)02/95]
This light comes on when the cruise control ON
switch is pressed. It turns off when the cruise
control OFF switch is pressed or when the
ignition is turned to the OFF position.
[LG08351(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0001376-A
Cruise control indicator light
%
Anti-lock Brake System Warning Light
(If equipped)
*[LG08392(ALL)01/95]
This light comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition key to the START position. It
should go off shortly after the engine starts. If it
stays on longer than five (5) seconds, it indicates
that your anti-lock brake system may not be
working properly. Normal braking is not
affected unless the BRAKE system warning light
also remains on for longer than six (6) seconds.
*[LG08391(ALL)02/95]
81
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
You should have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your dealer or qualified service
technician to restore the benefits of the anti-lock
feature. See Anti-lock brakes in the Index for more
information.
[LG08394(ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0000674-D
Anti-lock brake system warning light
*[LG08396(ALL)10/93]
% [LG08400(ALL)01/95]
*
Gauges
Fuel Gauge
[LG08425(ALL)11/94]
The fuel gauge displays approximately how
much fuel is in the fuel tank only when the
ignition is in the ON position.
[LG08525(ALL)11/94]
For proper fuel gauge indication after adding
fuel, the ignition should be in the OFF position
while the vehicle is being refueled.
*[LG08625(ALL)06/93]
The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when
the vehicle is in motion.
[LG08725(ALL)11/94]
With the ignition in the OFF position, the fuel
gauge indicator may drift from the ignition ON
indication.
*[LG08800(ALL)01/95]
*[LG08900(ALL)03/95]
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
*[LG09000(ALL)08/95]
The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into
the Normal band as the engine coolant warms
up. It is acceptable for the pointer to fluctuate
within the Normal band under normal driving
%
This gauge indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the
coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the
gauge indication will not be accurate.
82
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
conditions. Under certain driving conditions,
such as heavy stop and go traffic or driving up
hills in hot weather, the pointer may move to
the top of the Normal band.
[LG09005(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0001095-B
Engine coolant temperature gauge
[LG09100(ALL)05/95]
If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves
above the Normal band, the engine coolant is
overheating and continued operation may cause
engine damage.
*[LG09150(ALL)01/95]
*[LG09200(ALL)03/95]
*[LG09300(ALL)01/95]
*[LG09400(ALL)05/95]
*[LG09410(ALL)04/95]
If your engine coolant overheats:
[LG09415(ALL)11/94]
If the coolant continues to overheat, have the
cooling system serviced.
1.
Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
2.
Turn off the engine.
3.
Let the engine cool.
4.
Check the coolant level following the
instructions on checking and adding coolant
to your engine, see Engine Coolant in the
Index. If you do not follow these
instructions, you or others could be injured.
83
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
*[LG09800(ALL)01/95]
*[LG09900(ALL)01/95]
Speedometer
*[LG10000(ALL)01/95]
*[LG10100(ALL)01/95]
Odometer
*[LG10200(ALL)11/94]
*[LG10300(ALL)11/94]
Trip Odometer
%
%
%
The speedometer tells you how many miles
(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.
The odometer tells you the total number of miles
(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven.
The trip odometer tells you how many miles
(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven since
the last reset. Press the reset button to return the
trip odometer to zero.
%
Tachometer
[LG10340(ALL)02/95]
The tachometer tells you the approximate engine
revolutions per minute (how fast the engine is
running). You may damage the engine if you
drive with the indicator in the red zone.
% [LG10350(ALL)12/95]
The Optional and SHO Clusters
[LG10360( T)02/95]
The optional cluster and the SHO cluster have
indicator lights that are not on the standard
cluster. For details about these lights, read the
information below. To learn about the standard
warning lights and gauges that come on all
clusters, see The Standard Cluster earlier in this
chapter.
[LG10365( T)12/95]
The optional cluster has a 120 mph (200 km/h)
speedometer and a 7,000 rpm tachometer.
[LG10370( T)02/95]
The SHO cluster also has a 150 mph (240 km/h)
speedometer and an 8,000 rpm tachometer.
*[LG10320(ALL)02/95]
84
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG10401(ALL)03/95]
full page art:0000644-I
The optional cluster
85
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG10501( T)02/95]
full page art:0000665-N
The SHO cluster
86
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG14750(ALL)12/95]
Low Coolant Light and Chime
[LG14850(ALL)04/95]
This light indicates that the level of the engine
coolant is low inside the coolant reservoir.
[LG14950(ALL)04/95]
one inch art:0000114-C
Low coolant light
[LG15000(ALL)12/95]
This light comes on for a few seconds when
your ignition key is turned to the ON position,
but should turn off when the engine starts. If the
coolant is low, the light will come on and a
single chime will sound. If this light stays on,
check the level of coolant inside the coolant
reservoir. For instructions on adding coolant
mixture, see Engine coolant in the Index.
% [LG15150(ALL)12/95]
Low Washer Fluid Light
*[LG15250(ALL)02/95]
This light comes on if the reservoir is less than a
quarter full when you turn on the windshield
washers.
[LG15350(ALL)04/95]
one inch art:0000118-B
Low washer fluid light
% [LG16100(ALL)12/95]
Rear Lamp Out Indicator
[LG16200(ALL)12/95]
This light indicates that a rear tail lamp or
brakelamp is not functioning. It comes on
momentarily when the ignition is turned to the
ON position, then goes out.
87
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG16220(ALL)02/95]
This light will come on to show a rear tail lamp
burnout when the light switch is turned to the
parking lamp or headlamp position.
[LG16260(ALL)04/95]
This light will come on to show a brakelamp
burnout only when the brake pedal is pressed.
[LG16280(ALL)02/95]
The light will stay on until the ignition is turned
to the OFF position.
[LG16300(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0000117-B
Rear lamp out light
[LG16400(ALL)12/91]
NOTE: The warning light may not work or
you may get a false reading if you use
trailer lights or use improper
replacement bulbs.
[LG16700(ALL)12/95]
Anti-Theft Alarm Light
[LG16800(ALL)11/94]
This light is used when you set the anti-theft
alarm system. See Anti-theft system in the Index.
[LG16825(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0001389-A
Anti-theft alarm light
88
File:05fclgt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996
[LG16950(ALL)12/95]
Overdrive Off Indicator
[LG16975(ALL)02/95]
This light tells you that the Overdrive Off (O/D
OFF) switch on the gearshift lever has been
pushed. When the light is on, the transaxle will
not shift into overdrive. Depressing the O/D
OFF switch located below the gearshift release
button on the floor gearshift or located on the
end of the column gearshift will return the
vehicle to “overdrive on” mode. The transaxle
will be in the “overdrive on” mode when the
vehicle is started even if the “O/D OFF” mode
was selected when the vehicle was last shut off.
[LG17025(ALL)02/95]
If the light does not come on when the O/D
OFF switch is depressed or if the light flashes
when you are driving, have your vehicle
serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition
persists, damage could occur to the transaxle.
[LG17050(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0001009-B
Overdrive off indicator
89
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP00400(ALL)05/95]
The main controls for the climate control system,
clock, and radio are in the oval Integrated
Control Panel on the instrument panel.
[IP00410(ALL)04/95]
The controls for the lights and climate control air
registers are also on the instrument panel.
*[IP00420(ALL)03/95]
Clean the instrument panel lens and woodtone
trim with a soft cloth and a glass cleaner. Do
not use paper towel or any abrasive cleaner to
clean either the lens or the woodtone trim as
these may cause scratches.
*[IP00430(ALL)09/95]
%
NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the
gloss (shine) of the upper part of the
instrument panel should be avoided.
The dull finish in this area is to help
protect the driver from undesirable
windshield reflection.
91
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
% [IP00470(ALL)04/95]
full page art:0000661-J
Instrument panel
92
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
%
*[IP00500(ALL)06/95]
*[IP00600(ALL)06/95]
[IP00900(ALL)08/95]
[IP01000(ALL)04/95]
The Climate Control Systems
Your vehicle has one of the following climate
control systems:
❑ Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
❑ Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC) System
*[IP01100(ALL)06/95]
If you are not sure which system your vehicle
has, see the diagrams on the following pages.
% [IP03150(ALL)08/95]
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
System
[IP03175(ALL)03/95]
one third page art:0000698-E
The knobs that control the manual heating and air
conditioning system
[IP03200(ALL)08/95]
Fan speed knob
[IP03250(ALL)08/95]
The fan speed knob controls the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle. There are four fan
speeds: LO, medium/low (first dot),
medium/high (second dot), and HI.
[IP03300(ALL)08/95]
Function selector knob
[IP03351(ALL)08/95]
The function selector knob controls airflow to
the inside of the vehicle.
93
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
*[IP03401(ALL)08/95]
MAX A/C
[IP03450(ALL)08/95]
MAX A/C uses recirculated air to cool the
vehicle. It allows for faster cooling but is noisier
than A/C. The airflow will be from the
instrument panel registers.
*[IP03501(ALL)08/95]
A/C
[IP03550(ALL)04/95]
A/C uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It is
quieter that MAX A/C, but not as economical.
The airflow will be from the instrument panel
registers.
%
VENT
[IP03650(ALL)03/95]
VENT brings in outside air through the
instrument panel registers. It can be used for
heating or ventilating.
[IP03701(ALL)08/95]
OFF
[IP03750(ALL)08/95]
In OFF, outside air is shut out and the fan will
not operate.
*[IP03601(ALL)03/95]
[IP03801(ALL)04/95]
S (Panel and floor)
[IP03850(ALL)04/95]
This brings in outside air through the instrument
panel registers and the front and rear floor
ducts. It can be used for heating or ventilating.
*[IP03901(ALL)08/95]
R (Floor)
[IP03950(ALL)04/95]
This allows for maximum heating. The airflow is
from the front and rear floor ducts.
94
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP04001(ALL)04/95]
[IP04050(ALL)04/95]
*[IP04100(ALL)08/95]
%
P (Floor and defrost)
This brings in outside air through the floor ducts
and the windshield defroster ducts. It can be
used for heating or ventilation.
V (Defrost)
[IP04150(ALL)04/95]
This brings in outside air through the
windshield defroster ducts. It can be used to
clear ice or fog from the windshield.
[IP04200(ALL)08/95]
Temperature control knob
[IP04250(ALL)08/95]
The temperature control knob may be adjusted
from cool (blue range) to warm (red range).
%
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
System
[IP04725(ALL)12/95]
The control for your Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control (EATC) is located at the
center of the instrument panel in the Integrated
Control Panel and will operate only when the
ignition is turned to the ON position.
*[IP04825(ALL)05/95]
The EATC feature maintains the temperature
you select and automatically controls the airflow
for your comfort. It also allows you to override
the automatic operation with manual override
buttons.
*[IP04700(ALL)04/95]
95
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP04925(ALL)12/95]
full page art:0001285-D
The Electronic Automatic Temperature Control System
96
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP05025(ALL)03/95]
To turn your EATC on, press the AUTO button
or any of the six manual override buttons along
the bottom of the control.
[IP05125(ALL)03/95]
To turn your EATC off, press the OFF button.
When the system is off, the Display window will
be blank (dark).
[IP05225(ALL)02/95]
If you select AUTO, the system will
automatically determine fan speed and airflow
location. If a manual override button is selected,
your selection determines airflow location only.
Fan speed remains automatic unless you
override it by pressing either side of the FAN
speed button located at the extreme left of the
control panel.
*[IP05250(ALL)10/95]
Temperature selection
[IP05275(ALL)10/95]
The TEMP button at the upper left of the
Control is for temperature selection. The a side
of the TEMP button will increase the set
temperature and the b side of the TEMP button
will lower the set temperature. Pressing the
button and releasing it will change the set
temperature one degree. Holding either side of
the button in will rapidly change the
temperature setting in one degree increments to
either 65˚F (18˚C) or 85˚F (29˚C). Then, the set
temperature will jump 5˚F(3˚C) and stop at
either 60˚F (16˚C) which is maximum cooling or
90˚F (32˚C) which is maximum heating.
[IP05325(ALL)10/95]
To change the temperature, select any
temperature between 6O˚F (16˚C) and 90˚F
(32˚C) by pressing the a or b side of the
TEMP button. The EATC will display the
selected temperature.
97
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP05425(ALL)03/95]
If you want continuous maximum cooling, press
the b side of the TEMP button until 60˚F (16˚C)
is shown in the display window. Your EATC
will cool at maximum and disregard the 60˚F
(16˚C) setting until you select a warmer
temperature with the a side of the TEMP
button. If you want continuous maximum
heating, press the a side of the TEMP button
until 90˚F (32˚C) is shown in the display
window. Your EATC will provide maximum
heat regardless of the 90˚F (32˚C) setting until
you select a cooler temperature with the b side
of the TEMP button.
[IP05525(ALL)12/95]
one third page art:0001286-D
The display window
[IP05625(ALL)02/95]
The display window will indicate the selected
temperature and the operating function you
have chosen: AUTO or one of the six manual
overrides. It will also indicate manual control of
the fan speed with the word FAN, H, and dots.
The display window with all possible displays
and their positions are shown here. Normally
not all are shown at the same time but are
included here to familiarize you with the names
and symbols.
98
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP05650(ALL)10/95]
Changing the display from farenheit to
celsius
[IP05675(ALL)10/95]
To change the temperature display from
Farenheit to Celsius, depress the MAX A/C and
V F-DEF at the same time and hold them
down for about a second. To change back to the
original setting, repeat the process. If the battery
is disconnected, the display will revert to
Fahrenheit and must be reset to Celsius.
*[IP05725(ALL)01/95]
Automatic operation
[IP05825(ALL)03/95]
Press the AUTO button and select the desired
temperature. The selected temperature and
AUTO will be shown in the Display window.
The EATC will automatically heat or cool to
achieve the set temperature. Under normal
conditions, your EATC will need no additional
attention.
[IP05925(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0001287-B
The AUTO temperature display
[IP06025(ALL)03/95]
When in AUTO and weather conditions require
heat, air will be sent to the floor. But a feature is
included in your EATC to prevent blowing cold
air to the floor if the engine coolant is not warm
enough to allow heating. The EATC will direct
the airflow to the windshield at low fan speed.
In 3-1/2 minutes or less, the fan speed will start
to increase and the airflow will change to the
floor area.
99
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP06100(ALL)03/95]
When in AUTO and weather conditions require
cooling, the EATC will use outside air or
recirculated air, depending on the temperature
that is selected.
[IP06125(ALL)04/95]
If unusual conditions exist (i.e., window fogging,
etc.), the six manual override buttons allow you
to select special air discharge locations. The fan
speed button allows you to adjust the fan speed
to suit your needs.
[IP06625(ALL)11/94]
Fan speed button
[IP06725(ALL)04/95]
Your EATC automatically adjusts the fan speed
to the existing conditions. You must press AUTO
for automatic fan speed operation. To control the
fan speed yourself, use the button which will
cancel the automatic fan speed control. The
button is located at the left side of the EATC
control panel. It is marked H. Press the (-) side
for lower speeds. Press the (+) side for higher
speeds.
[IP06925(ALL)03/95]
When you press the fan speed button, the fan
speed will go to manual control. The display
window will show the word FAN, H and a
series of dots along with the selected
temperature and operating function.
[IP07025(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0001290-B
The fan display
100
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP07125(ALL)12/95]
You can override the fan speed at any time. If
you use the button to control the fan speed, the
EATC will continue to control the temperature
but you control the fan speed. To return to auto
fan control, press the AUTO button. If you are
operating in one of the override functions (S,
MAX A/C, etc.), automatic fan control will
continue unless you press the fan speed button.
To return to automatic fan control, press the
AUTO button. The EATC will return to
automatic operation. If you want to return to
any override function, press the button for that
function. The fan speed will continue to be
automatically controlled.
*[IP07225(ALL)01/95]
Manual override buttons
[IP07325(ALL)04/95]
Your EATC has six buttons which allow you to
make special selections. The buttons are located
along the bottom edge of the EATC and allow
you to determine where the air will be
discharged. Pressing any override button
changes the air discharge location only. It does
not affect the ability of the system to control
temperature or the fan speed. Return to fully
automatic operation by pushing the AUTO
button.
*[IP07425(ALL)01/95]
MAX A/C button
[IP07525(ALL)04/95]
The MAX A/C feature allows for faster cooling
because air is drawn from inside the vehicle.
Using inside air causes the fan to sound louder
which is normal for this selection. The display
window will change to indicate MAX A/C and
the airflow will be from the instrument panel
registers. To exit, push AUTO or any of the
other five manual override buttons.
101
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
%
VENT button
[IP07725(ALL)03/95]
Press this button to select outside air through
the instrument panel registers. The display
window will show the set temperature and
VENT to the lower right of the temperature.
Your EATC will heat the air if the temperature
you have selected is warmer than the outside air
coming into the vehicle. However, the air will
NOT be cooled regardless of the temperature
setting. Airflow will be from the instrument
panel registers.
*[IP07625(ALL)01/95]
[IP07825(ALL)04/95]
[IP07925(ALL)02/95]
[IP08025(ALL)04/95]
[IP08125(ALL)03/95]
[IP08225(ALL)04/95]
[IP08325(ALL)02/95]
S (Panel and floor) button
Push this button to get air from the floor and
instrument panel registers at the same time. The
display will show the set temperature and S.
Depending on the selected temperature, the air
will be automatically heated or cooled.
R (Floor)
Airflow will be to the floor when the R (floor)
button is pressed. The display window will
show the set temperature and R (floor) to the
right of the temperature. Fan speed will be
automatic unless manually controlled. If you
override the fan speed and wish to return to
automatic fan control, press AUTO. Then, again
select R (floor) for airflow to the floor.
P (Floor and defrost)
Press this button to get air to the floor and
windshield defrosters at the same time. The
display will show the set temperature and P. If
the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) and
above, the air will be dehumidified to remove
moisture. This will help to prevent fogging in
humid weather.
102
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
% [IP08425(ALL)07/95]
[IP08525(ALL)02/95]
V F-DEF (Front defrost)
Press the V F-DEF (front defrost) button to
obtain maximum airflow to the windshield.
Adjust the temperature setting as required for
defrosting. The Display window will show the
temperature setting with V to the right of the
temperature. When the outside temperature is
about 50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will be
dehumidified to remove moisture. This will help
prevent fogging in humid weather.
[IP08625(ALL)04/95]
OUTSIDE TEMP button
[IP08725(ALL)05/95]
When this button is pressed, the temperature of
the air outside of the vehicle will show in the
display window. If the EATC is off, the display
will go blank after 4 seconds. If the EATC is on,
the outside temperature will be shown until the
OUTSIDE Temp button is pressed a second time
or another override button is pressed.
*[IP08825(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: The outside temperature reading is
most accurate when the vehicle is
moving. Higher readings may be
obtained when the vehicle is not
moving. The readings that you get may
not agree with temperatures given on
the radio due to differences in vehicle
and station locations.
*[IP08850(ALL)04/95]
*[IP08875(ALL)04/95]
Service
If your EATC is not operating as described here,
take it to your dealer to have it checked. System
diagnostics are built in which will allow your
dealer to readily identify problems that might
occur.
103
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP08925(ALL)04/95]
Operating tips
*[IP09025(ALL)03/95]
The following tips will help you to get the most
satisfaction from your climate control system.
[IP09125(ALL)04/95]
❑ In humid weather, select V F-DEF (front
defrost) before driving. This will help to
prevent windshield fogging. After a few
minutes of operation, switch to any desired
selection.
*[IP09325(ALL)03/95]
❑ Do not put objects under the front seats that
[IP09425(ALL)04/95]
❑ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air
interfere with the flow of air to the back seat
area.
intake area of your climate control system
which could block the air intake. The intake
area is located at the bottom of the
windshield, under the hood at the passenger
side rear corner.
[IP09500(ALL)03/95]
❑ If the air conditioner performs well in MAX
A/C but not in A/C, this may indicate that
the MicronAirH filter (if equipped) needs to
be replaced.
[IP10000(ALL)03/95]
MicronAirH Air Filter (If equipped)
*[IP10100(ALL)02/95]
Your vehicle may have an air filter that removes
pollen and road dust from outside air before it
is directed to the interior of the vehicle. For
maintenance of this filter, see Servicing Your
Taurus.
% [IP21650(ALL)04/95]
Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side
View Mirrors
*[IP21700(ALL)02/95]
The defroster for the rear window clears frost,
fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside
of the rear window and activates the heated side
view mirrors.
[IP21900(ALL)04/95]
The button for the rear defroster and heated side
view mirrors is on the instrument panel.
104
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP22200(ALL)04/95]
one inch art:0000651-E
The button that controls the rear window defroster and
heated side view mirrors
[IP22300(ALL)04/95]
Clear away any snow that is on the rear
window and side view mirrors before using the
defroster. With the engine running, push the
defrost button. After 10 minutes, the defroster
will turn off. If the window and mirrors are still
not clear, push the defroster button again. The
defroster will turn off when the ignition key is
turned to the OFF position.
%
NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners with abrasives to
clean the inside of your rear window.
If you do, you may damage the heating
elements that are bonded to the inside
of the rear window and cause damage
to the rear window defroster.
% [IP23200(ALL)12/95]
Liftgate Window Wiper and Washer
(If equipped)
*[IP23000(ALL)09/95]
[IP23401(ALL)04/95]
quarter page art:0000696-E
The liftgate window wiper and washer switches
[IP23500(ALL)04/95]
To turn on the liftgate window wiper, press the
b switch. To turn the liftgate window wiper
off, press the switch again.
105
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP23550(ALL)04/95]
To turn on the liftgate window washer, press the
d switch. When the d switch is pressed, it also
turns on the liftgate wiper.
*[IP23600(ALL)01/95]
% [IP23700(ALL)01/95]
*
The Interior and Exterior Lights
%
[IP23800(ALL)12/95]
Turning On the Exterior Lights
To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, side
markers, license plate lamps and tail lamps, use
the knob that is to the left of the steering wheel.
[IP24200( T)10/95]
one third page art:0000695-C
The knob for the headlamps, parking lamps, license plate
lamps and tail lamps
[IP24500(ALL)12/95]
To turn on the parking lamps, side markers,
license plate lamps and tail lamps, turn the knob
to “P” or the first position.
[IP24600(ALL)12/95]
To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, side
markers, license plate lamps and tail lamps, turn
the knob to the second position.
106
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP25200(ALL)03/95]
one third page art:0001411-B
Turning on the high beams
% [IP25250(ALL)02/89]
To change your headlamps from low to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
To change them back to low beam, pull the
lever toward you.
*[IP25300(ALL)03/93]
For more information about how the high beam
headlamps work, see Steering column controls in
the Index.
%
Daytime Running Light System
[IP25610(ALL)03/95]
(Canadian and fleet vehicles only)
*[IP25615(ALL)03/95]
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is
designed to turn the high beam headlamps on,
with a reduced light output and without
illuminating the high beam indicator lamp in the
instrument panel. The DRL system operates
when all of the following conditions are met:
*[IP25620(ALL)03/95]
*[IP25625(ALL)01/95]
❑ The vehicle is “running.”
❑ The vehicle has a fully released parking
*[IP25630(ALL)03/95]
*[IP25635(ALL)09/95]
❑ The headlamp system is in the OFF position.
*[IP25605(ALL)01/95]
brake.
NOTE: If you have a vehicle with an
automatic lighting system, the DRL
system is active until the automatic
system turns on the headlamps.
107
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
*[IP25636(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turn
on in the flash-to-pass mode during
nighttime driving.
[IP25637(ALL)01/95]
You may notice that the lights flicker when the
vehicle is turned on or off. This is a normal
condition.
*[IP25638(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
will not illuminate the tail lamps and
parking lamps. Turn on your headlamps
at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a
collision.
*[IP25640(ALL)08/95]
*[IP25650(ALL)08/95]
%
Cleaning the Exterior Lamps
Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these
may cause scratches or crack the lamps.
%
Setting the Autolamp Delay System
(If equipped)
*[IP26700(ALL)02/95]
The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on and
off automatically. You can use the autolamp to:
*[IP26800(ALL)01/95]
*[IP26900(ALL)01/95]
❑ turn on the lamps automatically at night
❑ turn off the lamps automatically during
[IP27000(ALL)11/94]
❑ keep the lamps on for up to three minutes
*[IP26600(ALL)02/95]
daylight
after you turn the ignition to the OFF
position.
108
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP27100(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0000693-C
The autolamp system on the left side of the instrument
panel
*[IP27400(ALL)01/95]
*[IP27450(ALL)05/95]
To set the autolamp:
1.
Make sure the headlamp knob is in the OFF
position. If the knob for the headlamps is
ON, you cancel the autolamp.
*[IP27550(ALL)01/95]
2.
Turn the ignition key to ON or start your
vehicle.
*[IP27650(ALL)01/95]
3.
Find the autolamp thumbwheel to the left of
the steering wheel on the instrument panel.
[IP27750(ALL)02/95]
4.
Turn the autolamp thumbwheel past the stop
to the beginning of the MAX position. The
indicator light will come on.
*[IP27850(ALL)01/95]
5.
The autolamp automatically turns the lamps
on and off for you.
[IP27950(ALL)10/95]
Do not put any articles on top of the photocell
that is located in the top right corner of the
instrument panel. This photocell controls the
autolamp. If you cover it, the photocell reacts as
if it is nighttime, and the lamps turn on.
*[IP28050(ALL)01/95]
To turn the autolamp off, move the thumbwheel
back to OFF.
109
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
*[IP28500(ALL)01/95]
You can set the autolamp so the headlamps stay
on for up to three minutes after you turn your
vehicle off.
*[IP28600(ALL)01/95]
To keep the lamps on after you leave your
vehicle:
*[IP28650(ALL)01/95]
❑ Turn the thumbwheel as far into the MAX
*[IP28750(ALL)01/95]
❑ The further you move the thumbwheel into
range as you want.
the DELAY area (toward the MAX position),
the longer the lamps will stay on after you
leave your vehicle. Similarly, if you move the
thumbwheel only slightly into the DELAY
area, your lamps will stay on only for a
moment after you turn your vehicle off.
%
Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument
Panel
*[IP30000(ALL)05/95]
With the light knob in the parking lamps or the
headlamps position, you can brighten or dim the
lights in the instrument panel. To do this, use
the thumbwheel to the left of the steering wheel.
This wheel also turns on the interior lights with
the light knob on or off.
*[IP29800(ALL)01/95]
% [IP30300(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0000692-C
The thumbwheel that controls the light on the instrument
panel
110
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP30700(ALL)11/94]
To dim the instrument panel lights, rotate the
thumbwheel down. To turn on the interior
lights, turn the thumbwheel all the way up. The
interior lights also come on when any side door
or the liftgate is opened.
% [IP30925(ALL)03/95]
Dome Lamps
[IP30950(ALL)03/95]
The front dome lamp is located overhead
between the driver and front passenger seats.
However, if your vehicle is equipped with a
power moon roof, the dome lamp is located
behind the moon roof.
[IP30975(ALL)11/94]
In the wagon, the rear dome lamp is located
overhead near the rear seating positions.
[IP31025(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0001410-A
The dome/map lamp
[IP31050(ALL)03/95]
Turn the map lamps on and off with the
switches on the lamp. The dome lamp
illuminates when any door is opened. If either
the driver’s or passenger’s front door is opened
using the outside door handle, the light will
remain on for 25 seconds after the door has been
shut. If any other door is opened or if either of
the front doors is opened using the inside
handle, the lamp will immediately turn off when
the door is closed.
111
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
[IP31075(ALL)11/94]
quarter page art:0001377-A
The dome lamp
[IP31100(ALL)03/95]
The dome lamp will stay illuminated if the
switch is pushed to the ON position. The dome
lamp will stay off if the switch is pushed to the
OFF position. When the switch is positioned to
the door/middle position, the dome lamp will
come on when either of the front doors or the
liftgate (wagon) is opened.
[IP31125(ALL)03/95]
The rear dome lamp also illuminates when the
liftgate is opened and goes off when it is closed.
[IP31150(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0001378-A
The map lamps on the moon roof console
[IP31175(ALL)11/94]
Turn each map lamp on the moon roof console
on and off with the switch near that lamp.
112
File:06fcipt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996
*[IP31200(ALL)04/95]
*[IP31300(ALL)04/95]
%
Cleaning the Interior Lamps
Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are
plastic and should be cleaned with a mild
detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear
water.
%
Battery Saver
[IP31500(ALL)11/94]
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will
turn off battery voltage to the interior lights
after 40 minutes.
*[IP31600(ALL)09/95]
This will prevent draining of the battery if those
lights have been left on inadvertently or if a
door is not completely closed. Battery voltage to
these lamps will be restored when the outside
front door handles are lifted, the keyless entry
keypad is used, the remote entry transmitter is
used, any door is opened, the trunk is opened,
or the ignition key is turned to the ON position.
*[IP31400(ALL)01/95]
*[IP32600(ALL)03/95]
%
Clock
[IP33200(ALL)03/95]
quarter page art:0000247-G
The digital clock
*[IP33750(ALL)05/95]
1.
To set the hour, press and hold the hour
button. When the desired hour appears,
release the button.
*[IP33850(ALL)05/95]
2.
To set the minutes, press and hold the
minute button. When the desired minute
appears, release the button.
113
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
Steering Column Controls
*[SC00400(ALL)01/95]
The controls on the steering column and wheel
are designed to give you easy access to the
controls while you are driving.
*[SC00500(ALL)01/95]
*[SC00600(ALL)01/95]
The Turn Signal Lever
%
You can use the turn signal lever on the left side
of the steering column to:
*[SC00700(ALL)07/94]
*[SC00800(ALL)01/95]
*[SC00900(ALL)05/95]
*[SC01000(ALL)01/95]
❑ operate the turn signals
❑ turn the high beams on/off
❑ flash the lamps
❑ turn the windshield wipers and washer
*[SC01100(ALL)01/95]
*[SC02201(ALL)03/95]
Turn Signals
*[SC02401(ALL)03/95]
If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move
the lever back to the center (off) position.
*[SC02451(ALL)08/95]
For lane changes, move the lever far enough to
signal but not to latch. The lever will return to
the off position when you release it.
*[SC02800(ALL)08/95]
*[SC03100(ALL)05/95]
High Beams
%
%
on/off
Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move
it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp
control knob to the headlamp ON position and
push the turn signal lever away from you until
it latches. When the high beams are ON, the
high beam indicator light on the instrument
panel comes on.
115
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
*[SC03200(ALL)05/95]
To turn off the high beams, pull the lever
toward you until it latches. The high beam
indicator light turns off.
*[SC03300(ALL)08/95]
*[SC03400(ALL)06/95]
Flashing the Lights
%
To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward
you for a moment and then release it. The
headlamps will flash whether the headlamp
knob is in the on or off position.
[SC03450(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001411-B
The turn signal lever
%
*[SC03500(ALL)08/95]
*[SC03600(ALL)03/95]
Windshield Wipers and Washer
To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition
key must be turned to the ON or ACC position.
[SC03900(ALL)05/94]
Turn the knob on the end of the turn signal
lever away from you to activate the wipers. The
first seven detents are interval wipe positions,
the eighth detent is the LO position, and the
ninth detent is the HI position.
*[SC04000(ALL)01/95]
To turn the wipers off, turn the knob toward
you to the OFF position.
116
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
*[SC04100(ALL)08/95]
*[SC04300(ALL)01/95]
%
Variable Interval Wipers
In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle
has wipers that you can set to operate at
varying intervals. For example, you can set the
interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles
or more often in heavier rain.
[SC04500(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001412-B
The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever
*[SC04925(ALL)03/94]
To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at the
end of the turn signal lever toward or away
from you until the wipers are going at the
desired interval.
*[SC04950(ALL)08/95]
Windshield Washer
[SC05000(ALL)05/94]
To clean the windshield, push in the end of the
wiper switch knob. For a constant spray, keep
the knob pushed in. After you release the knob,
the wipers operate for two to three cycles before
turning off (if the wipers were off) or returning
to HI, LO, or the interval setting selected.
[SC05050(ALL)04/95]
For information about the rear washer on the
wagon, see Windshield washer fluid and wipers in
the Index.
117
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
*[SC05100(ALL)03/95]
If the washer does not work, check the washer
fluid level and fill it if it is low. See the Servicing
Your Taurus chapter. If there is enough fluid,
consult your nearest Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer.
*[SC05300(ALL)08/95]
Do not try to clean the windshield when the
washer fluid container is empty or activate the
washers at any time for more than 15 seconds
continuously. This could damage the washer
pump system.
*[SC05350(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
In freezing weather, the washer solution
may freeze on the windshield and obscure
your vision. Always warm up the
windshield with the defroster before you
use the washer fluid. If you cannot see
through the windshield clearly, it can
increase the risk of being involved in a
collision.
*[SC05500(ALL)08/95]
*[SC05520(ALL)03/95]
%
For information about refilling the washer fluid
or replacing your windshield wiper blades, see
Windshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.
Hazard Flasher
[SC05540(ALL)05/89]
one third page art:0000238-A
Using the hazard flasher switch
118
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
*[SC05560(ALL)03/95]
The hazard flasher serves as a warning to other
drivers to be careful when approaching or
passing your vehicle.
*[SC05590(ALL)03/95]
The flashers work whether your vehicle is
running or not. The flashers work for up to two
hours when the battery is fully charged and in
good condition without draining the battery
excessively. If the flashers run for longer than
two hours or if the battery is not fully charged,
the battery can be drained.
*[SC05600(ALL)01/95]
*[SC05800(ALL)05/95]
Horn
%
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
[SC06000(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0001403-B
The horn on the steering wheel
%
*[SC06210(ALL)05/95]
*[SC06400(ALL)04/95]
Tilt Steering
RWARNING
Never adjust the steering column/wheel
when the vehicle is moving. You could
lose control of the vehicle and injure
someone.
119
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
[SC06650(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000658-B
The lever to tilt the steering wheel
*[SC06800(ALL)04/95]
To change the position of the steering
column/wheel, pull the release lever on the
column toward you. Tip the steering wheel to
the desired position. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
*[SC07400(ALL)03/91]
*[SC07500(ALL)06/95]
Cruise Control (If equipped)
%
If your vehicle has cruise control, you can
automatically maintain a constant speed at or
above 30 mph (50 km/h).
*[SC07550(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when using
the cruise control. This will cause the
engine to overspeed.
*[SC07600(ALL)06/95]
Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or
in Canada the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
approved may cause the speed control to
malfunction. Therefore, use only properly
installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radio
transmitting equipment in your vehicle.
120
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
[SC08000(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0001399-B
The cruise control buttons on the steering wheel
*[SC08200(ALL)08/95]
To set the cruise control:
[SC08400(ALL)11/94]
1.
Press and release the ON switch. The
CRUISE indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate that speed
control is in a standby mode.
*[SC08500(ALL)08/95]
2.
Accelerate to the desired speed above
30 mph (50 km/h) using the accelerator
pedal.
*[SC08800(ALL)08/95]
3.
Press the SET ACCEL switch and release it
immediately to set your speed. If you keep
this switch pressed, your speed will continue
to increase.
*[SC08900(ALL)08/95]
4.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set.
*[SC09000(ALL)08/95]
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your
vehicle may momentarily slow down or speed
up, even though the speed control is on. This is
normal.
121
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
[SC09011(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If your speed increases above your set
speed while driving in j (Overdrive)
on a downhill grade, you may want to
shift to D (Drive) to reduce vehicle
speed (or, turn j [Overdrive] off by
depressing the O/D OFF switch on the
gearshift lever). The cruise control
cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it
goes above your set speed on a
downhill grade. For the best fuel
economy during normal driving
conditions, leave the gearshift in j
(Overdrive), or resume as soon as
practical.
*[SC09100(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Do not use the speed control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding,
slippery, or unpaved.
%
Accelerating With the Cruise Control
Operating
*[SC09300(ALL)08/95]
You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up
momentarily. When you take your foot off the
accelerator, the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
% [SC09340(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at high
altitudes, or when pulling a trailer, you
may want to drive in D (Drive) (or
turn j [Overdrive] off by depressing
the O/D OFF switch). This will
improve cruise control performance.
*[SC09200(ALL)08/95]
122
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
[SC09350(ALL)03/95]
NOTE: When driving uphill, especially with a
heavy load, you may notice your speed
decreasing even if you have the cruise
control set. If the speed drops more
than 8 to 14 mph (13-23 km/h) it is
normal for the automatic cruise control
feature to be cancelled. You may need
to use the accelerator pedal to help
your vehicle maintain the selected
speed when driving up steep grades.
*[SC09400(ALL)08/95]
*[SC09410(ALL)08/95]
Resetting the Cruise Control
%
To reset the cruise control to a lower speed, use
one of the following procedures:
*[SC09415(ALL)08/95]
❑ COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch.
*[SC09420(ALL)08/95]
❑ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle
% [SC09425(ALL)11/94]
❑ TAP-DOWN — Press and then quickly
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
attains the desired speed, press the SET
ACCEL switch and release it immediately.
release the COAST switch. Each time you
“tap” the switch, the set speed will decrease
by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will
cause the set speed to decrease in increments
of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if the
current set speed is 60 mph (96 km/h) 5 taps
of the COAST switch will decrease the
vehicle speed and SET it at 55 mph
(88 km/h).
*[SC09430(ALL)08/95]
If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph
(50 km/h) by any of the above methods, then
you must manually accelerate to a speed over
30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.
123
File:07fcsct.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996
[SC09435(ALL)02/95]
To reset the cruise control to a higher speed,
use one of the following procedures:
*[SC09440(ALL)08/95]
❑ ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCEL
*[SC09445(ALL)08/95]
❑ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
% [SC09450(ALL)11/94]
❑ TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release the
switch. Release the switch when the vehicle
has accelerated to the desired speed.
vehicle attains the desired speed, press the
SET ACCEL switch and release it
immediately.
SET ACCEL switch. Each time you “tap” the
switch, the set speed will increase by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause the set
speed to increase in increments of 1 mph
(1.6 km/h). For example, if the current set
speed is 55 mph (88 km/h) 5 taps of the SET
ACCEL switch will increase the vehicle speed
and SET it at 60 mph (96 km/h).
*[SC10900(ALL)11/95]
Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed
[SC11000(ALL)04/95]
If you press the brake pedal, cruise control is
cancelled. You can return to the set speed by
pressing the RESUME switch, as long as you did
not press the OFF switch. You must be driving
at least 30 mph (50 km/h).
*[SC11300(ALL)05/95]
Your vehicle will gradually return to the
previously set speed and then maintain it.
*[SC11315(ALL)08/95]
*[SC11325(ALL)08/95]
*[SC11400(ALL)10/95]
To Turn Off the Cruise Control System
%
Press the OFF switch.
In addition, the cruise control is turned off each
time you turn the vehicle ignition off.
124
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
Features
*[FV00400(ALL)02/95]
Your vehicle has a variety of features designed
for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read
this chapter to find out about standard and
optional features.
%
Doors
% [FV01700(ALL)11/94]
Childproof Locks
[FV01800(ALL)02/95]
In addition to standard or power locks, your
vehicle has childproof locks for the rear doors. If
you set these locks, the doors cannot be opened
from the inside of the vehicle. The doors can still
be opened from the outside when the lock knobs
are raised.
*[FV00500(ALL)01/95]
[FV02200(ALL)10/95]
half page art:0000448-D
The childproof locks for the rear door
125
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV02300(ALL)03/95]
To set the childproof lock on each rear door,
open the rear door.
[FV02500(ALL)02/95]
Find the lever inside the label. Move the lever
up to the locked symbol.
[FV02700(ALL)02/95]
To release the childproof lock, open the rear
door from the outside. Move the lever down to
the unlocked symbol.
%
Power Door Locks (If equipped)
[FV03830(ALL)02/95]
If your vehicle has power door locks, the
controls to lock the doors are on the trim panel
of the front door. When you close the doors
after you set the door locks, the doors remain
locked. If the power mechanism ever fails, the
manual door lock will override the power
controls.
*[FV03700(ALL)04/95]
[FV03950(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000963-F
The power locks on the driver’s door
[FV04000(ALL)04/95]
If the key is left in the driver’s or passenger’s
outside lock cylinder for a period of time, the
power door locks may cycle. This is a protective
feature and will not harm the locks. When the
key is removed, the locks will function normally.
126
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV04010(ALL)04/95]
Central Locking
[FV04020(ALL)04/95]
When you are unlocking the driver or front
passenger door with the key, turn it once
toward the front of the vehicle to unlock that
door only. Turn the key a second time to unlock
all doors. Turn the key once toward the rear of
the vehicle to lock all doors.
[FV04050(ALL)04/95]
Lock Disable
[FV04075(ALL)03/95]
The lock disable feature helps prevent you from
locking the keys in your vehicle. With the key in
the ignition (in any switch position) and the
driver’s door open, the driver’s door cannot be
locked using the front door power lock switch.
[FV04100(ALL)02/95]
Your vehicle can still be locked, while the key is
in the ignition, by manually pressing down the
lock button.
[FV04125(ALL)02/95]
Power liftgate lock — wagon (If equipped)
[FV04150(ALL)02/95]
The power liftgate lock is on the right inside
trim panel in the cargo area. When this lock is
pressed, all doors and the liftgate lock.
[FV04175(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0001407-A
The power liftgate lock
127
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
%
Using the Keyless Entry System
(If equipped)
*[FV04301(ALL)02/95]
If your vehicle has the keyless entry system, you
can lock or unlock the vehicle doors without
using a key. The buttons for the system are near
the outside door handle on the driver’s side. See
also Remote Entry System which follows this
description.
*[FV04251(ALL)09/95]
[FV04351(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0000482-C
Keyless entry buttons
*[FV04401(ALL)02/95]
When you bought your vehicle, you were given
a computer code that operates the system for
your vehicle. For your convenience, we have
duplicated this code in two places.
*[FV04451(ALL)09/95]
*[FV04501(ALL)09/95]
The code is:
*[FV04551(ALL)02/95]
*[FV04601(ALL)05/95]
❑ taped to the computer module
❑ on your owner’s wallet card found in the
glove compartment
When you use this entry system, the illuminated
entry system turns on the interior lights for 25
seconds and the buttons on the keypad light up
for 5 seconds. Do not push the buttons with a
key, ballpoint pen, pencil or any other hard
object. These objects could damage the buttons.
128
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV04651(ALL)09/95]
*[FV04700(ALL)02/95]
Programming your own entry code
*[FV04751(ALL)09/95]
*[FV04801(ALL)09/95]
*[FV04851(ALL)09/95]
To program your own code:
*[FV04901(ALL)09/95]
*[FV04951(ALL)09/95]
%
You can program a personal code to unlock
your vehicle with the keypad. This code does
not replace the permanent code that the
dealership gave you. Use your personal code in
the same manner as you would your original
code.
1.
Select five digits for your personal code.
2.
Enter the permanent code that the dealership
gave you.
3.
Within five seconds, press 1/2.
4.
Within five seconds of pressing 1/2, enter
your personal code, pressing each digit
within five seconds of the previous digit.
The keyless entry system registers this
second code. To open your vehicle, you can
now use either code. The module remembers
only one personal code at a time. Entering a
second personal code will erase the first,
replacing it with the new second one.
*[FV05000(ALL)09/95]
*[FV05050(ALL)09/95]
*[FV05101(ALL)09/95]
*[FV05150(ALL)09/95]
*[FV05201(ALL)09/95]
*[FV05250(ALL)09/95]
To erase your personal code:
1.
Enter the original permanent code.
2.
Press 1/2 within five seconds of Step 1.
3.
Wait six seconds.
The keyless entry system automatically
erases your personal code. The system will
now only respond to the permanent code.
129
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV05301(ALL)09/95]
Do not set a code that presents the numbers in
sequential order, such as 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/0.
Studies show that people who idly press the
buttons usually press a sequential pattern. Also,
do not select a code that uses the same button
five times. Thieves can easily figure out these
types of codes.
%
Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry
system
*[FV05401(ALL)02/95]
You must unlock the driver’s door before you
unlock any of the other doors. If you let more
than five seconds pass between pressing
numbers, the system shuts down, and you have
to enter the code again. The system has shut
down if the keypad light is out. If the keyless
entry system does not work properly, use the
key or transmitter(s) to lock and unlock the
doors.
*[FV05450(ALL)09/95]
1.
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory
code or your personal code. All codes have
five numbers. After you press the fifth
number, the driver’s door unlocks.
[FV05500(ALL)04/95]
2.
To unlock the passenger’s door(s) and
liftgate (wagon), press the 3/4 button within
five seconds of unlocking the driver’s door
or re-enter the code to open the driver’s
door, then press 3/4.
[FV05525(ALL)03/95]
3.
To open the trunk (sedan) or unlock the
liftgate (wagon), enter the five-digit factory
code, then press the 5/6 button within 5
seconds.
*[FV05350(ALL)09/95]
130
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV05550(ALL)09/95]
Locking the doors with the keyless entry
system
*[FV05601(ALL)09/95]
Along with unlocking your doors, you can use
the keyless entry system to lock the doors. You
can also use the Autolock feature to
automatically lock the doors after you get in the
vehicle.
*[FV05650(ALL)02/95]
To lock all of the doors, press 7/8 and 9/0 at
the same time. It is not necessary to first enter
the keypad code. This will arm your factory
installed anti-theft system, if so equipped.
[FV05701(ALL)03/95]
Arming, disarming and resetting your
perimeter anti-theft system (If equipped)
from the keyless entry pad
*[FV05750(ALL)05/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
factory installed anti-theft system, the keyless
entry system will arm it when you use the 7/8
and 9/0 keys to lock the doors, and will disarm
or reset a triggered anti-theft alarm when you
enter in the five digit code to unlock the driver’s
door.
*[FV05800(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Doors and the liftgate must be fully
closed for the anti-theft system to arm.
Refer to the Anti-Theft System section
in this chapter for more details.
131
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV05850(ALL)04/95]
Autolock (If equipped)
*[FV05900(ALL)02/95]
The Autolock feature is part of your remote
keyless entry system and is enabled at the
factory. With the Autolock feature enabled, all of
the doors will automatically lock when:
[FV05950(ALL)04/95]
❑ the vehicle doors and liftgate are fully closed
❑ the ignition key is turned to the ON position
❑ the brake pedal is pressed
❑ you shift through (Reverse)
❑ one second has elapsed after the brake pedal
*[FV06001(ALL)09/95]
*[FV06050(ALL)02/95]
*[FV06100(ALL)02/95]
*[FV06150(ALL)11/95]
is released
*[FV06200(ALL)09/95]
The Autolock feature will repeat when:
[FV06250(ALL)04/95]
❑ a door is opened and then all doors and
liftgate are closed
[FV06300(ALL)12/95]
❑ the brake pedal is released
*[FV06400(ALL)02/95]
The doors may not lock automatically at the
correct time if the driver:
*[FV06450(ALL)02/95]
❑ shifts through gears without pressing the
*[FV06500(ALL)02/95]
❑ shifts through gears quickly after starting the
*[FV06550(ALL)02/95]
❑ releases their foot from the brake while
*[FV06575(ALL)04/95]
You can deactivate the system by using the
buttons for the keyless entry system if you don’t
want to use the Autolock feature.
brake
vehicle
someone has stepped out of the vehicle for a
moment
132
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV06600(ALL)05/95]
*[FV06650(ALL)06/95]
To deactivate the Autolock system:
1.
Enter your permanent five-digit entry code
(not the personal code you may have set).
*[FV06700(ALL)09/95]
*[FV06750(ALL)09/95]
2.
Within 5 seconds, press and hold 7/8.
3.
Within 5 more seconds, press and release
3/4.
*[FV06800(ALL)09/95]
*[FV06850(ALL)02/95]
4. Release 7/8.
To reactivate the Autolock system, simply repeat
the instructions for deactivating the system. By
re-entering the code that deactivates the
Autolock, the keyless entry system reinstates the
Autolock feature.
You can also deactivate or reactivate the
Autolock feature by this method:
*[FV06900(ALL)04/95]
[FV06950(ALL)04/95]
1.
Make sure the anti-theft system is not armed
or triggered, ignition is off, and all doors
and liftgate are closed.
*[FV07000(ALL)02/95]
*[FV07050(ALL)02/95]
*[FV07100(ALL)02/95]
*[FV07150(ALL)02/95]
*[FV07200(ALL)02/95]
2.
Turn the ignition key from OFF to RUN.
3.
Press the door power unlock button 3 times.
4.
Turn the ignition key from RUN to OFF.
5.
Press the door power unlock button 3 times.
6.
Turn the ignition key back to RUN within 30
seconds of step 2.
*[FV07250(ALL)02/95]
7.
The horn should chirp once. If not, wait 30
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 6.
*[FV07300(ALL)02/95]
*[FV07350(ALL)02/95]
*[FV07400(ALL)02/95]
8.
Press the door power unlock button.
9.
Press the door power lock button.
*[FV07450(ALL)02/95]
11. Turn the ignition OFF.
10. The horn will chirp once if the Autolock
feature was deactivated, twice (one short
chirp followed by a long chirp) if the
Autolock feature was activated.
133
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV07550(ALL)03/95]
*[FV07600(ALL)02/95]
Remote Entry System (If equipped)
*[FV07650(ALL)06/95]
The system will work with up to four
transmitters. Your vehicle came with two
transmitters. Additional transmitters can be
ordered from your dealer.
*[FV07700(ALL)02/95]
The remote entry features only operate with the
ignition in the OFF position.
If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you
can lock or unlock the vehicle doors and liftgate
without using a key. The remote also has a
personal alarm feature. The buttons for the
system are located on the two hand held
transmitters that came with your vehicle.
[FV07751(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0001000-A
Remote entry transmitter
%
Unlocking the doors with the remote entry
system
*[FV07851(ALL)02/95]
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK
button.
[FV07901(ALL)12/95]
To unlock the other doors and liftgate (wagon),
press the UNLOCK button a second time, within
five seconds after the first UNLOCK.
[FV07910(ALL)04/95]
To open the trunk (sedan), press the TRUNK
button.
*[FV07801(ALL)02/95]
134
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV07920(ALL)04/95]
To unlock the liftgate (wagon), press the TRUNK
button. To open the liftgate, you must press the
liftgate release located above the license plate.
*[FV07951(ALL)02/95]
Locking the doors with the remote entry
system
[FV08001(ALL)12/95]
To lock all the doors and liftgate (wagon), press
the LOCK button. This will also arm the factory
installed Anti-Theft system.
[FV08051(ALL)04/95]
If you would like a signal that the doors are
being locked, press the LOCK button again
within five seconds. If all doors and the liftgate
are completely closed, the doors and liftgate will
lock again, the horn will chirp and the external
lamps will flash. If a door or the liftgate is open
or ajar, the horn will give two short chirps
warning you that a door or the liftgate is open.
*[FV08100(ALL)02/95]
*[FV08151(ALL)02/95]
Remote entry personal alarm
*[FV08200(ALL)02/95]
When you use the remote entry UNLOCK or
PANIC buttons, the illuminated entry system
turns on the vehicle’s interior lights for 25
seconds. You can turn these lights off with the
remote entry LOCK button or by turning the
ignition to the ON or ACCESSORY position.
%
If you wish to activate the remote entry system
personal alarm, press the PANIC button. This
will honk the horn and flash the lights for
approximately 2 minutes 45 seconds. You can
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button again
from the transmitter or by turning the ignition
to the ON or ACCESSORY position.
135
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV08251(ALL)04/95]
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF
THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT
TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS
DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE
UNDESIRED OPERATION.
%
Arming and Disarming the Alarm System
with Remote Entry
*[FV08351(ALL)04/95]
Your Remote Entry System will automatically
arm the factory installed Anti-Theft System when
the doors are locked, and automatically disarm it
when the doors are unlocked. The remote will
also reset the anti-theft alarm (when the driver’s
door is unlocked or the PANIC button is pressed
on a programmed remote entry transmitter) if it
was triggered.
*[FV08400(ALL)04/95]
The remote entry system may not arm and
disarm non-factory installed anti-theft systems.
*[FV08451(ALL)02/95]
*[FV08500(ALL)02/95]
Replacing the batteries
*[FV08300(ALL)04/95]
%
The remote entry transmitter is powered by two
coin type three-volt lithium 2016
batteries (included) that should last for several
years of normal use. If you notice a significant
decrease in operating range, the batteries should
be replaced. Replacement batteries can be
purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or
at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
136
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV08551(ALL)02/95]
NOTE: The operating range of the remote
entry system can also be affected by
weather conditions (such as very cold
temperatures) or structures around the
vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio
and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating
range will allow you to be up to 33
feet (10 meters) away from your
vehicle.
*[FV08600(ALL)02/95]
The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace
the batteries by twisting a thin coin between the
two halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKE
THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER
APART. When installing the new batteries, be
sure to place the positive (+) side down as
marked. Snap the two halves back together.
[FV08651(ALL)02/95]
quarter page art:0020790-A
Replacing the batteries
*[FV08700(ALL)02/95]
*[FV08751(ALL)06/95]
Replacing lost transmitters
*[FV08800(ALL)02/95]
You can also purchase additional transmitters
(up to 4 transmitters can be used) from your
dealer. You will need to take all your
transmitters to the dealer so they can program
them to the remote entry system all at the same
time.
%
In the event a transmitter is lost, you should
take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your
dealer to have the remote entry system
deprogrammed for the lost transmitter. This is
necessary to prevent further unauthorized use of
the lost transmitter.
137
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV08851(ALL)04/95]
Illuminated Entry System
[FV08900(ALL)10/95]
This system will provide illumination of the
vehicle’s interior courtesy lamps when either
outside driver’s door keypad is pressed or when
the remote entry system is used to unlock the
door or sound the personal alarm. The system
will automatically turn off after approximately
25 seconds or when the ignition is turned to the
RUN or ACC position.
*[FV08951(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The inside lights will not turn off if
you have turned them on with the
dimmer thumbwheel or if any door is
open.
[FV09551(ALL)04/95]
Perimeter Anti-Theft System (If equipped)
*[FV09600(ALL)05/95]
When armed, this system helps protect your
vehicle against break-ins or theft.
%
When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system
triggers and will:
*[FV09700(ALL)02/95]
❑ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and theft
*[FV09751(ALL)06/95]
% [FV09801(ALL)05/95]
*
*[FV09851(ALL)04/95]
❑ honk the horn
Arming the system
[FV09900(ALL)04/95]
❑ Pressing the remote entry transmitter LOCK
*[FV09651(ALL)05/95]
indicator lamp
The system is ready to arm any time the ignition
switch is turned OFF and the alarm is not
triggered or sounding. Any of the following
events will prearm the anti-theft system:
button to lock the doors (with the doors open
or closed).
[FV09951(ALL)10/95]
❑ Pressing the 7/8 and 9/0 buttons on the
Keyless Entry Keypad at the same time to
lock the doors (with the doors open or
closed).
138
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV10001(ALL)04/95]
❑ Opening a door and pressing the power door
[FV10050(ALL)04/95]
❑ Turning the driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock button to lock the doors.
key to the LOCK position to centrally lock all
doors (with the doors open or closed).
[FV10100(ALL)12/95]
If a door or liftgate (wagon) is open, the
anti-theft system is prearmed and waiting for all
doors to close. The THEFT inidcator in the
instrument panel will light continuously while
the system is prearmed.
[FV10201(ALL)12/95]
Once all doors and liftgate (wagon) are closed, if
any were open, the system will begin a 30
second countdown to become armed. The 30
second countdown allows people who may still
be in the vehicle time to exit without triggering
the alarm. The THEFT indicator will glow
steadily until the system is armed. When the
system is armed, the THEFT indicator will begin
to flash with short flashes every 2 seconds until
the system is triggered or disarmed.
[FV10251(ALL)12/95]
Remember, all doors and liftgate (wagon) must
be fully closed for the anti-theft system to arm.
If a door or liftgate (wagon) has been left open
or ajar, and you press the remote entry
transmitter twice to confirm the doors are
locked, two short horn chirps will warn you that
the anti-theft system is not arming.
*[FV10301(ALL)05/95]
The anti-theft system is designed to work with
the factory installed remote entry system. It may
not work with other remote entry systems.
*[FV10351(ALL)02/95]
When you get a single horn chirp by pressing
the LOCK button twice within 5 seconds on
your remote entry transmitter, you can be
assured that all doors are locked and the
anti-theft system is arming.
139
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV10400(ALL)04/95]
Disarming the system
*[FV10451(ALL)10/95]
An armed or activated system can be disarmed
if you:
*[FV10501(ALL)04/95]
❑ Unlock the doors by pressing the remote
*[FV10551(ALL)04/95]
❑ Unlock the doors by entering the unlock code
[FV10601(ALL)12/95]
❑ Unlock any door or the liftgate (wagon) with
entry transmitter UNLOCK button.
on the keyless entry keypad.
a key.
*[FV10651(ALL)02/95]
*[FV10700(ALL)04/95]
❑ Turn ignition to the ON or ACC position.
❑ Pressing the remote entry PANIC button will
*[FV10751(ALL)02/95]
When unlocking the vehicle with a key, turn the
key all the way to the end of its travel or the
system may not disarm.
[FV10800(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: the flashing lights and honking horn
will shut off automatically within 2
minutes 45 seconds after the system is
triggered. It will trigger again if
another intrusion occurs.
[FV10802(ALL)04/95]
Coded Key Anti-Theft System
[FV10806(ALL)10/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with the coded key
anti-theft system, you can only use an
electronically coded key to start the vehicle.
During each vehicle start sequence, the coded
key is “read” by the anti-theft system. If the
key’s ID code matches that in the anti-theft
system, the vehicle is enabled to start. If the
key’s ID code does not match the anti-theft
system, or if no coded key is detected, then the
vehicle is not able to start. Your vehicle was
equipped with two electronically coded keys.
The coded ignition key is larger than normal
due to the electronics located in the head of the
disarm the anti-theft system only when the
anti-theft alarm is triggered and sounding.
140
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
key. Additional spare keys, maximum of 14, can
be purchased either through your dealership or
selected retailers. Be sure to purchase only coded
keys with a Ford or Mercury logo on it to
ensure proper functionality. If both supplied
keys are lost or stolen or only one key has been
lost and you want to ensure that key will not
start the vehicle, the vehicle must be taken to
the dealership for re-initialization. (All keys must
be brought to the dealer, if any.)
[FV10808(ALL)04/95]
THEFT indicator
*[FV10810(ALL)10/95]
The indicator provides system proveout and
operating status. The system activates the
indicator when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON or START position. This indicator helps
to determine possible fault conditions and/or
normal operating proveout. The system will
illuminate the indicator for two (2) seconds then
go out to acknowledge normal operating
conditions. If the indicator does not illuminate at
key ON or flashes, have the system serviced.
*[FV10812(ALL)10/95]
*[FV10814(ALL)10/95]
Spare Key Programming Procedure
*[FV10816(ALL)10/95]
❑ Using a coded key that you can start your
*[FV10820(ALL)10/95]
❑ Within 15 seconds, insert a new key into the
*[FV10825(ALL)10/95]
If the key has been coded, the theft indicator
will illuminate for two seconds. The key can
then be used to start the vehicle.
*[FV10826(ALL)10/95]
Repeat until all chosen keys have been coded
(max=16).
Two electronically coded keys were supplied
with your vehicle, use one of these with the
procedure below:
engine with, turn the ignition from the ON to
the OFF position.
ignition and turn it to ON or START. The
vehicle does not have to be started.
141
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV10828(ALL)10/95]
If the key coding failed, the theft indicator will
flash and the vehicle cannot be started. One of 3
causes are possible:
*[FV10830(ALL)10/95]
❑ The new key was not inserted within 15
*[FV10832(ALL)10/95]
❑ All 16 key codes have been stored or
❑ The key does not have an electronic code.
Windows
[FV10835(ALL)04/95]
*[FV10850(ALL)02/95]
% [FV10900(ALL)02/95]
*
*[FV10950(ALL)02/95]
%
seconds or
Using the Power Windows
Each door has a power control that opens and
closes the window on that door. The driver’s
door has a master control panel that operates all
four windows.
[FV11001(ALL)02/95]
The power windows only operate when the
ignition key is in the ON or ACC position or
when the ignition has been turned from the ON
to the OFF position and/or the key has been
removed and no front doors on the vehicle have
been opened.
[FV11050(ALL)02/95]
The power window controls are illuminated.
*[FV11100(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Do not let children play with the power
windows. They may seriously hurt
themselves. Make sure occupants are clear
of the window(s) before closing.
142
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV11150(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0000417-D
The master controls on the driver’s door
[FV11201(ALL)12/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a “one touch
down” feature. This feature allows the driver to
fully open the driver’s window by firmly
pressing the switch and then releasing. The “one
touch down” feature can be stopped by pressing
the up or down switch again.
[FV11250(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0000418-D
The window controls on the passenger’s door
[FV11270(ALL)03/95]
Accessory Delay
[FV11290(ALL)04/95]
The power windows and moon roof (if
equipped) can be operated for 45 seconds after
the ignition has been turned to the OFF position
if the front doors have not been opened.
143
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
%
Moon Roof (If equipped)
[FV11351(ALL)03/95]
You can use the moon roof in your vehicle in
two ways. Move it back to open the glass panel,
or you can move it up to ventilate the vehicle.
[FV11400(ALL)02/95]
The moon roof will only operate when the
ignition is in the ON or ACC position or when
the key has been removed from the ignition and
no doors have been opened.
*[FV11301(ALL)02/95]
[FV11451(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0000419-D
The map lamps and the switches for the moon roof
[FV11500(ALL)02/95]
The roof console SLIDE switch is used to open
and close the moon roof.
[FV11550(ALL)04/95]
Press the AUTO portion of the switch and the
roof will fully open automatically. Press the
switch again during the opening cycle and the
roof will stop at that location.
[FV11600(ALL)04/95]
To close the moon roof, press and hold the front
portion of the switch. At the fully closed
position, the motor automatically turns off.
[FV11850(ALL)02/95]
The roof console TILT switch is used to tilt the
moon roof.
[FV11900(ALL)04/95]
To tilt the moon roof into vent position from the
closed position, press the UP portion of the
switch.
144
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV12000(ALL)07/95]
To close from vent position, press and hold the
rear portion of the switch.
*[FV12100(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
Do not let children play with the moon
roof. They may seriously hurt themselves.
*[FV12200(ALL)01/95]
Occasionally wiping the outside guide rail covers
of the moon roof with a clean cloth will help
keep the moon roof working properly.
[FV12300(ALL)11/94]
quarter page art:0000420-B
The moon roof
*[FV12400(ALL)01/95]
*[FV12500(ALL)01/95]
Sliding Shade
*[FV12600(ALL)05/95]
To close the sliding shade, pull the shade toward
the front of the vehicle. The shade automatically
opens and locks when the moon roof is opened.
*[FV12700(ALL)01/95]
% [FV12702(ALL)04/95]
*
*[FV12704(ALL)02/95]
Seats
%
*[FV12705(ALL)05/95]
The moon roof has a sliding shade that you can
manually open or close to block the sun when
the glass panel is shut.
Head Restraints
If you use them properly, head restraints are
intended to help protect your head and neck in
a collision.
A head restraint helps protect you best if you
position it behind your head and not behind
your neck.
145
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV12706(ALL)02/95]
*[FV12708(ALL)01/95]
Standard head restraints
You can adjust the head restraints for your
comfort and protection.
[FV12714(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0000031-E
Adjusting the standard head restraint
*[FV12720(ALL)06/95]
Four-way head restraints
[FV12722(ALL)05/94]
Your vehicle may have a four-way head
restraint. It can be adjusted in four directions.
You can raise it about two inches (five cm) from
its normal position, and you can move it
forward up to 60 degrees until you reach the
desired position.
[FV12724(ALL)03/92]
one third page art:0010049-B
Adjusting the four-way head restraint
146
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
%
Manual Seats
[FV13000(ALL)04/95]
You can move the front seats forward or
backward and tilt the seatback forward or
backward.
*[FV12900(ALL)08/95]
[FV13200(ALL)04/95]
quarter page art:0000421-C
The front seat adjustment bar
[FV13300(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0000422-C
The handle to recline the back of the driver’s seat
*[FV13900(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback
when the vehicle is moving.
*[FV13950(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
147
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV15650(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Do not pile cargo higher than the
seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a
collision or sudden stop.
%
Power Seats (If equipped)
[FV22000(ALL)02/95]
If your vehicle has power seats, you can adjust
the driver’s seat in several directions. You can
raise or lower the whole front seat, move the
seat forward or backward and tilt the front and
back of the seat up or down. If your vehicle is
equipped with power lumbar support, the
lumbar switch also lets you inflate a pad on the
seatback.
*[FV21900(ALL)02/95]
[FV22200(ALL)02/95]
half page art:0000423-D
The seat controls on the driver’s seat
148
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
% [FV22800(ALL)05/94]
Inflating the lumbar support (If equipped)
[FV22950(ALL)04/89]
To inflate the pads, press and hold the front of
the switch. To deflate the pads, press and hold
the back of the switch.
[FV23000(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000424-B
The seat controls for the lumbar support on the driver’s
seat
*[FV23100(ALL)11/94]
*[FV23125(ALL)11/94]
Using the Split-Folding Rear Seat
[FV23150(ALL)04/95]
Detach the shoulder belt from the lap belt in the
center rear seating position before folding down
the passenger side of the rear seat.
[FV23175(ALL)11/94]
To lower the rear seatback from inside the
vehicle:
[FV23225(ALL)02/95]
1.
Lift the seatback release handle on the upper
outboard corner of the seatback.
[FV23250(ALL)02/95]
2.
Grasp the pull tab and fold the seatback
forward until it rests on the cushion.
%
Your vehicle is equipped with split-folding rear
seats. One or both rear seatbacks can be folded
down to provide additional cargo space.
149
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV23260(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001379-A
Folding down the rear seatbacks
[FV23275(ALL)05/95]
To raise the seatback:
[FV23325(ALL)02/95]
1.
Lift the seatback rearward until it is in the
upright position. Push the center of the seat
until you hear it latch.
[FV23330(ALL)05/95]
2.
Make sure the seatback is locked in position
by pushing forward and backward on it.
*[FV23360(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Securely latch the seatback in the upright
position to prevent the seatback or objects
from being thrown forward during a
sudden stop or collision.
[FV23375(ALL)11/94]
To lower the rear seatback from the trunk:
[FV23390(ALL)11/94]
1.
Move the release lever on the back of the
rear seatback to the OPEN position.
[FV23420(ALL)11/94]
2.
Fold the seatback forward.
150
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV23421(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001406-B
The seatback release lever in the trunk
*[FV23422(ALL)04/95]
*[FV23424(ALL)08/95]
*[FV23426(ALL)05/95]
Cleaning the Seats
*[FV23427(ALL)04/95]
*[FV23428(ALL)05/95]
Fabric
*[FV23429(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a
small, hidden area of fabric. If the
fabric’s color or texture is adversely
affected by a particular cleaner, do not
use it.
%
%
Leather
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a
soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,
wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner
or a mild soap.
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom
or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots
immediately. Follow the directions that come
with the cleaner.
151
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
% [FV23500(ALL)04/95]
Positive Retention Driver’s Side
Floor Mat (If equipped)
[FV23520(ALL)04/95]
Installing the Floor Mat
*[FV23530(ALL)01/95]
Position the floor mat in the footwell. Place the
mat eyelet over the pointed end of the retention
post from the rear and rotate forward to install.
Adjust the floor mat position to allow proper
operation of accelerator pedal, brake pedal and
clutch pedal.
[FV23550(ALL)11/94]
half page art:0001094-B
The positive retention floor mat
[FV23560(ALL)04/95]
Removing the Floor Mat
*[FV23570(ALL)01/95]
Lift floor mat just forward of retention post and
rotate rearward to disengage from retention
post.
152
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
%
*[FV23600(ALL)01/95]
% [FV24800(ALL)05/95]
*
% [FV25200(ALL)04/95]
Mirrors
Side View Mirrors
Your vehicle comes with electric adjustable and
heated side view mirrors. The outside rearview
mirror on the right is a convex mirror. This
mirror gives you a wider view of the lanes on
your right and behind you.
[FV25600(ALL)04/95]
RWARNING
Be careful. The convex outside rearview
mirror on the right makes objects appear
smaller and farther away than they
actually are. Use the inside rearview
mirror (or look behind you) to determine
the actual size and distance of objects that
appear in the convex mirror.
[FV25800(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000428-C
The mirror controls on the driver’s door
[FV26200(ALL)04/95]
To adjust the side view mirrors
*[FV26900(ALL)01/95]
1.
Find the control switch in the driver’s door
panel.
[FV27000(ALL)02/95]
2.
Select the right or left mirror by moving the
selector switch to the right or the left.
*[FV27100(ALL)01/89]
3.
Move the control knob in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
153
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV27200(ALL)06/94]
4.
Return the selector switch to the middle
position to keep the mirror in place.
[FV27250(ALL)02/95]
5.
To activate the heated feature of the outside
rearview mirror, turn on the rear window
defrost by pushing the R-DEF button on the
instrument panel.
%
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror
with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
*[FV27300(ALL)05/95]
*[FV27400(ALL)03/95]
Sun Visors
*[FV27275(ALL)01/95]
%
Using the Sun Visors
[FV27500(ALL)05/94]
Your vehicle may have special sun visors.
Besides the regular sun visor, you may have a
second sun visor. By using both the regular sun
visor and the second visor, you shield the sun
from both the front and the side of the vehicle
at the same time.
*[FV27600(ALL)03/95]
To block the sun, move the main visor sideways
and flip the second visor down.
[FV27700(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0001408-A
The sun visor
154
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
%
Turning on the Mirror Light on the Sun
Visors (If equipped)
[FV28500(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle has two different kinds of lighted
mirrors. Your vehicle may have one or both of
these lighted mirrors.
[FV28600(ALL)11/94]
To turn on the driver’s mirror that is attached to
the visor, lift the mirror cover. Adjust the
amount of light by sliding the switch.
*[FV27800(ALL)05/94]
[FV28700(ALL)11/94]
quarter page art:0000430-C
The mirror on the driver’s sun visor
[FV28900(ALL)11/94]
quarter page art:0000431-C
The mirror on the passenger’s sun visor
[FV29100(ALL)11/94]
To turn on the passenger’s mirror that is in the
main visor, grasp the lower center portion and
pull the mirror down. Adjust the amount of
light by sliding the switch.
155
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
%
*[FV29400(ALL)01/95]
*[FV29500(ALL)01/95]
Console
Your vehicle may have a full console. The full
console has the following features:
[FV29601(ALL)04/95]
two third page art:0000432-G
Features of the full console
[FV29650(ALL)04/95]
The release for opening the utility compartment
is on the front of the console, just below the
armrest. Press and release at the ridges, near the
driver’s seat, to open. The lid is spring-loaded
and will open automatically.
156
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV29675(ALL)04/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with a cellular
phone, press the latch release located on the
driver’s-side edge of the lid to access the phone.
[FV29750(ALL)11/94]
To open the cupholder on the full console, press
and release the door on the front of the console.
The door is spring-loaded and will open
automatically.
[FV29875(ALL)04/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with the column
shift, it has a center seating/stowage console in
the center front seating position. The center
seating/stowage console has the following
features:
[FV29900(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0001380-B
Features of the center seating/stowage console
[FV29925(ALL)04/95]
To open the storage compartment, raise the
armrest and pull the strap on the seat up and
toward the instrument panel.
% [FV29950(ALL)04/95]
The cupholders in the center seating/stowage
console can be removed for cleaning.
157
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
*[FV29975(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard
objects can injure you in a collision.
% [FV30101(ALL)04/95]
Cellular Phone (If equipped)
[FV30201(ALL)04/95]
For information about the cellular phone in your
vehicle, refer to the Cellular Phone User’s Manual
provided with your phone. For further questions
about your cellular phone, contact the Ford
Cellular System at 1-800-367-3013 (U.S.). In
Canada, please contact your dealer.
*[FV30301(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: It is recommended that you fold your
cellular phone antenna down onto the
back glass before entering a car wash.
[FV30400(ALL)04/95]
Ashtrays
[FV30500(ALL)04/95]
The ashtray can be converted to a storage
compartment for small objects by removing the
plastic heatproof liner.
[FV30600(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The heatproof plastic liner must be in
position for use as an ashtray.
*[FV32100(ALL)01/95]
*[FV32200(ALL)01/95]
Trunk
%
Opening the Trunk Manually
[FV32600(ALL)02/95]
To open the trunk from the outside, turn the key
to the right until the trunk opens.
[FV32900(ALL)11/94]
Remove the key before you close and lock the
lid. Shut the trunk lid completely.
[FV33100(ALL)04/95]
Using the Remote Control for the Trunk
[FV33200(ALL)04/95]
Press the remote release on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel to open the
trunk.
158
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV33300(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000434-C
The remote control for the trunk
[FV36200(ALL)05/94]
Special Features of Your Wagon
% [FV36300(ALL)02/95]
Liftgate
[FV36400(ALL)01/89]
Your wagon has a two-way liftgate that lets you
either open the entire liftgate or just the
window.
[FV36450(ALL)02/95]
To open the liftgate, press the release that is
hidden under the exterior trim panel just above
the license plate. Pull up on the handle to raise
the liftgate.
[FV36500(ALL)02/95]
The liftgate will not lock automatically when
you close it. To lock the liftgate with the key,
turn left. You can also use the central power
lock on the driver’s door or the LOCK button on
the remote entry keyfob, if your vehicle is so
equipped.
[FV36550(ALL)02/95]
When the liftgate is locked, the window will also
lock.
[FV36600(ALL)02/95]
To open the window, make sure the liftgate and
window are unlocked, then press the outside
lock cylinder. You can only open the window
from outside.
[FV36700(ALL)01/89]
To prevent any damage, close the liftgate and
window before you drive.
159
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV36800(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0000437-F
The liftgate
[FV37050(ALL)03/90]
RWARNING
If you drive with the liftgate window
open, you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. If you must drive
like this, keep the vents open so outside
air comes into the vehicle.
% [FV37200(ALL)11/94]
The Storage Area
[FV37300(ALL)10/90]
Loading the vehicle
[FV37400(ALL)10/90]
When you load the back of your vehicle, put the
load as far forward in the compartment as
possible. This will help distribute the weight
more evenly between the front and rear axles.
160
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
% [FV37700(ALL)02/95]
Storage compartments
[FV37800(ALL)02/95]
Your wagon comes with a storage compartment
in the floor of the cargo area. An additional
storage compartment is in the rear trim panel on
the right.
[FV38000(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0001409-C
The locking storage compartment in the rear of the wagon
% [FV38150(ALL)04/95]
Cargo Net (If equipped)
[FV38200(ALL)02/95]
The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the
cargo area of your vehicle. The net attaches to
anchors that are already in your trunk. Use all
available anchors to restrain the objects or they
will not be secured.
161
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV38300(ALL)05/91]
one third page art:0000441-B
The cargo net for the wagon
[FV38400(ALL)04/95]
Do not put more than 50 pounds (22 kg) in the
net. Any ropes or cords that you use must be as
strong as the cargo net or strong enough to
restrain a 50-pound (22 kg) object.
[FV38450(ALL)04/95]
This net is not designed to retain objects during
an accident.
% [FV38500(ALL)11/94]
Cargo Cover (If equipped)
[FV38600(ALL)01/89]
You can conceal luggage or cargo in the back of
your wagon with the cargo cover.
[FV38700(ALL)01/89]
To cover the back compartment:
[FV38800(ALL)02/95]
1.
Fasten the cover into the molded pockets in
the trim panel. Make sure the cover is right
side up, so it unrolls from the top.
[FV38900(ALL)04/95]
2.
Pull the end of the cover toward you and
hook it into the rear molded pockets in the
side trim panels in the rear, inserting the
right side first.
162
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV39000(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001471-A
The cargo cover
% [FV39200(ALL)11/94]
Luggage Rack
[FV39300(ALL)02/95]
You can move the rear luggage crossbar on top
of the vehicle to fit the item you need to carry.
The front crossbar does not move.
[FV39400(ALL)10/90]
To adjust the luggage rack:
[FV39500(ALL)02/95]
1.
Load your luggage close to the front
crossbar. Do not carry more than 100 pounds
(45 kg) or cause the vehicle to exceed the
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR), which
is shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label.
[FV39600(ALL)02/95]
2.
Loosen the adjusting levers on the rear
crossbar by pushing them toward the center
of the vehicle.
[FV39700(ALL)10/90]
3.
Slide the rear crossbar forward to hold your
luggage securely in place.
[FV39800(ALL)02/95]
4.
Clamp the adjusting levers again by pulling
them toward the outside of the vehicle.
[FV39825(ALL)00/95]
Make sure that the rear crossbar pins are locked
in slots by pulling forward and back on each of
the outside supports. If the crossbar slides, push
or pull until you hear it click and feel it lock
into position.
163
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV39850(ALL)02/95]
5.
Secure luggage or cargo with rope (up to
3/8"), NOT ELASTIC CORD, using the tie
down loops provided. There are three loops
on each outside rail and one at each end of
the cross bars.
[FV39875(ALL)02/95]
quarter page art:0001381-B
The adjusting levers for the luggage rack
[FV39900(ALL)11/94]
Leave the rear crossbar in its original back
position when you are not using it to hold
luggage to reduce aerodynamic drag and
improve fuel economy.
% [FV40000(ALL)11/94]
The Second Seats
[FV40100(ALL)11/94]
Your vehicle is equipped with split-folding
second seats. One or both second seatbacks can
be folded down to provide additional cargo
space.
[FV40200(ALL)02/95]
To lower the seatback:
[FV40300(ALL)02/95]
1.
Lift the seatback release handle on the upper
outboard corner of the seatback.
[FV40400(ALL)02/95]
2.
Fold the seatback forward until it rests on
the cushion.
164
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV40500(ALL)05/95]
To raise the seatback:
[FV40700(ALL)02/95]
1.
Lift the seatback rearward until it is in the
upright position. Push the center of the seat
until you hear it latch.
[FV40750(ALL)05/95]
2.
Make sure the seatback is locked in position
by pushing forward and backward on it.
*[FV40775(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Securely latch the seatback in the upright
position to prevent the seatback or objects
from being thrown forward during a
sudden stop or collision.
[FV40800(ALL)11/94]
The Third Seat
[FV40900(ALL)04/95]
The third seat faces the back of the wagon. For
height and weight limits, see the label on the
seat cushion. When the seat is down, the back
part of your wagon has a flat surface for
carrying cargo.
[FV41000(ALL)03/92]
To open up the seat:
[FV41100(ALL)04/95]
1.
Unlock the floor panel with the key.
[FV41200(ALL)11/94]
2.
Use the handle to fold the floor panel
toward the front of the car.
165
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV41250(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0001409-C
Opening the third seat in the rear of the wagon
[FV41270(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0000442-B
The third seat in a wagon
166
File:08fcfvt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996
[FV41350(ALL)04/95]
3.
Remove the cargo cover. The cargo cover
must be removed or the seatback cannot be
locked in the upright position.
[FV41450(ALL)11/94]
4.
Lift the remote latch release on the left side
of the well and fold the remaining floor
panel toward the front of the car until it
latches. Make sure the seatback is locked in
the upright position by pushing forward and
backward on it.
[FV41500(ALL)03/92]
To close the seat:
[FV41600(ALL)02/95]
1.
Ensure that the third row safety belts are
fully stowed, and belts located in notches.
[FV41700(ALL)11/94]
2.
Lift the remote latch release and push the
seat down until it latches.
[FV41800(ALL)04/95]
3.
Pull up on the handle and push the floor
panel into place.
[FV41850(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Be sure to keep the floor panel closed and
locked at all times. Unattended children
could possibly become trapped inside or
loose items could be thrown around.
167
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
% [AS10350(ALL)10/95]
full page art:0001446-B
Electronic Sound Systems
Stereo Radio
169
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
[AS10401(ALL)10/95]
full page art:0001447-B
Stereo Radio with Cassette
170
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
[AS10550(ALL)10/95]
full page art:0001448-B
Stereo Cassette with CD-DJ
171
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
% [AS10600(ALL)04/95]
Stereo and Stereo Cassette Radios
*[AS10650(ALL)08/95]
*[AS10700(ALL)10/95]
Using the Controls on Your New Radio
[AS10750(ALL)04/95]
Press the “VOL PUSH ON” button to turn the
radio on. Press again to turn off.
*[AS10800(ALL)10/95]
How to adjust the volume
[AS10825(ALL)02/95]
Turn the “VOL PUSH ON” knob to the right to
increase the volume and to the left to decrease
the volume. Dots illuminate in the display to
show relative volume level.
[AS10840(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If the volume is set above a certain
level when the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back to a
“nominal” listening level when the
ignition is turned back on. However, if
the radio power is turned off with the
“VOL PUSH ON” button, the volume
will not change and will remain at the
level set when the radio is turned back
on.
*[AS11000(ALL)10/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
[AS11125(ALL)04/95]
Press the “AM” or “FM” button to select the
desired frequency band or to stop/store cassette
tape (when a cassette is playing). Pressing the
“FM” button more than once will alternate
between FM1 and FM2. These functions are used
with the station memory buttons described
under How to tune radio stations.
How to turn the radio on and off
172
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
%
How to tune radio stations
[AS11300(ALL)04/95]
There are four ways for you to tune in a
particular station. You can manually locate the
station using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” to the
station, “SCAN” to the station or select the
station by using the memory buttons. These four
methods are described below.
*[AS11400(ALL)09/95]
❑ Using the “TUNE” function
*[AS11200(ALL)10/95]
[AS11525(ALL)02/95]
You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time by pressing and
releasing either the right (a) or left (b) side
of the “TUNE” or “TUNE/DISC” button. To
change frequencies quickly, press and hold
down either the right or left side of the
button.
*[AS11700(ALL)10/95]
*[AS11825(ALL)01/95]
❑ Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS12200(ALL)01/95]
❑ Using the “SCAN” function
Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK”
button to select the next listenable station up
the frequency band. Press the left (b) side of
the button to select the next listenable station
down the frequency band. By pressing and
holding the button, listenable stations can be
passed over to reach the desired station.
[AS12325(ALL)05/95]
Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the
scan mode up the frequency band, stopping
on each listenable station for approximately
five seconds. The band indicator (AM, FM1,
FM2) flashes during scan operation.
*[AS12340(ALL)02/95]
To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled station, press the “SCAN” button
again.
173
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS12700(ALL)10/95]
*[AS12850(ALL)10/95]
❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons
[AS12900(ALL)02/95]
Follow the steps below to set these buttons to
the desired frequencies:
*[AS13025(ALL)10/95]
*[AS13200(ALL)10/95]
1.
Select a band, then select a frequency.
2.
Press one of the memory preset buttons and
hold the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
*[AS13300(ALL)10/95]
3.
Follow the two steps above for each station
memory preset button you want to set.
[AS13510(ALL)04/95]
❑ Using the Radio Set feature
Your radio is equipped with 6 station
memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
[AS13515(ALL)04/95]
With Radio set, you can automatically set
strong stations into your memory buttons.
AM, FM1 and FM2 will be set sequentially.
[AS13545(ALL)04/95]
Turn the radio off with the “VOL PUSH ON”
knob. Press and hold the “SCAN” button and
turn the radio on by pressing the “VOL
PUSH ON” knob. Continue holding the
“SCAN” button until “RAD” is shown in the
display.
[AS13550(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If there are less than six strong stations
in the frequency band, the remaining
unfilled buttons will store the last
strong station detected on the band.
After all stations have been filled, the radio
will begin playing the station stored on
memory button 1.
*[AS13560(ALL)10/95]
174
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS13600(ALL)10/95]
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker
output of your radio
*[AS13800(ALL)10/95]
❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response
[AS13925(ALL)04/95]
*[AS14000(ALL)10/95]
[AS14125(ALL)04/95]
*[AS14400(ALL)10/95]
[AS14525(ALL)04/95]
*[AS14600(ALL)10/95]
[AS14725(ALL)04/95]
Press the right (a) side of the “BASS” button
to increase bass (more “lows”); press the left
(b) side of the “BASS” button to decrease
bass (less “lows”).
❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response
Press the right (a) side of the “TREB”
button to increase treble (more “highs”);
press the left (b) side of the “TREB” button
to decrease treble (less “highs”).
❑ Adjusting speaker balance
Balance control allows you to adjust the
sound distribution between the right and left
speakers. Press the right (a) side of the
“BAL” button to shift the sound to the right
speakers, and press the left (b) side to shift
the sound to the left speakers. The display
will show “BAL” and a dot indicating the
balance position.
❑ Adjusting speaker fader
Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
distribution between the front and rear
speakers. Press the right (a) side of the
“FADE” button to shift the sound to the front
speakers, and press the left (b) side to shift
the sound to the rear speakers. The display
will show “FADE” and a dot indicating the
fade position.
175
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
[AS14800(ALL)04/95]
Using the Power Antenna (If equipped)
*[AS14850(ALL)02/95]
The power antenna will automatically rise when
your radio is turned on and the ignition is in the
ON or ACC position. It will lower when either
the radio or the ignition is turned off.
*[AS14900(ALL)02/95]
*[AS14950(ALL)02/95]
Power antenna maintenance and care
*[AS15000(ALL)02/95]
❑ If your power antenna mast ever becomes
*[AS15050(ALL)02/95]
❑ Occasionally, the power antenna mast should
❑ Never drive your vehicle through a car wash
with the power antenna mast extended. This
can cause damage to the antenna mast, which
is not covered under warranty. Turn off your
radio and/or the vehicle. This will
automatically retract the antenna.
damaged, the mast may not extend or retract
properly which might limit reception
performance. In this case, it is not necessary
to replace the entire power antenna assembly.
A replacement mast can be obtained from
your dealership for a nominal fee.
be wiped clean with mild soap and water or
denatured alcohol. This prevents debris from
accumulating on the mast which can cause
excessive wear and decrease the power
antenna life. Never use petroleum-based
products to clean your antenna mast.
176
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS15100(ALL)08/95]
*[AS15150(ALL)08/95]
Common Radio Reception Conditions
*[AS15200(ALL)08/95]
*[AS15250(ALL)08/95]
1.
*[AS15300(ALL)08/95]
*[AS15350(ALL)08/95]
2.
*[AS15400(ALL)04/95]
*[AS15450(ALL)08/95]
3.
%
Several conditions prevent FM reception from
being completely clear and noise-free, such as
the following:
Distance/Strength
The strength of the FM signal is directly related
to the distance the signal must travel. The
listenable range of an average FM signal is
approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond
this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe
area and the signal becomes weaker.
Terrain
The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of
the area over which the signal travels may
prevent the FM signal from being noise-free.
Rounded off frequencies
Some FM radio stations advertise a
“rounded-off” frequency which is not the
frequency they actually broadcast on. For
example, a radio station that is assigned a
frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”
even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM
broadcast frequency.
%
Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
[AS15700(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the
cassette tape player.
[AS15800(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Adjust the volume, treble, bass, balance
and fade controls in the same manner
as for radio stations.
*[AS15600(ALL)08/95]
177
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS15900(ALL)08/95]
How to insert a tape
[AS16025(ALL)12/95]
Your cassette player is equipped with power
loading. Once you insert a tape and push
slightly (with the open edge to the right), the
loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of
the way in and play will begin after a
momentary tape tightening process. Display
indicates “TAPE” while tape is playing. If the
“TAPE” button is pressed when the cassette tape
player is empty, “NO” and “TAPE” will flash in
the display and radio play will continue.
[AS16050(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the
ignition on whether the radio is on or
off. However, if the radio is off, the
cassette tape will be loaded and stored.
[AS16300(ALL)12/95]
How to locate a desired selection on the
tape
*[AS16350(ALL)08/95]
There are four ways to quickly locate a desired
selection on the tape. You can use the fast
forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function.
Following are brief descriptions of each.
*[AS16400(ALL)09/95]
❑ Fast forwarding the tape
[AS16525(ALL)04/95]
To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”
button. The radio will automatically begin
playing until fast forward is manually
stopped (by pressing the “TAPE”, “EJ”,
“REW” or “FF” button) or the end of the
tape is reached. The display will show a
flashing X to indicate fast forward.
*[AS16535(ALL)01/95]
At the end of the tape, the direction
automatically reverses and plays the other
side of the tape.
178
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS16600(ALL)08/95]
[AS16725(ALL)04/95]
*[AS17000(ALL)08/95]
[AS17125(ALL)04/95]
❑ Rewinding the tape
To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.
The radio will automatically begin playing
until rewind is manually stopped (by
pressing the “TAPE”, “EJ”, “REW” or “FF”
button) or the beginning of the tape is
reached. The display will show a flashing X
to indicate rewind.
❑ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette
tape player
While in the tape mode, press the right (a)
side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to
the next selection on the tape (display
indicates “SEEK”). Press the left (b) side to
seek the previous tape selection.
*[AS17135(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If you want to restart a currently
playing tape selection, press the left
(b) side of the “SEEK” button after
approximately three seconds into the
current selection.
*[AS17200(ALL)08/95]
❑ Using the “SCAN” function with your
cassette tape player
[AS17325(ALL)02/95]
Press the “SCAN” button to begin the
forward scan mode on the tape currently
playing, stopping on each tape selection for
approximately an eight-second sampling
(display flashes “SCAN”).
[AS17345(ALL)04/95]
To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled tape selection press “SCAN” a
second time.
[AS17348(ALL)02/95]
How to change the side of the tape being
played
[AS17350(ALL)02/95]
The alternate side of the tape can be selected at
any time by pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.
179
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS17400(ALL)08/95]
How to eject the tape
[AS17525(ALL)04/95]
To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
“EJ” button. The radio will resume playing if the
power is on. The tape cartridge can be ejected
with radio power (and/or ignition) on or off.
*[AS17550(ALL)08/95]
How to store the tape
[AS17575(ALL)04/95]
Press the “AM” or “FM” button (or “CD”, if
equipped) to stop the tape player and resume
radio play (or CD-DJ).
*[AS17600(ALL)08/95]
*[AS17700(ALL)08/95]
Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature
*[AS17825(ALL)04/95]
Push the k button to activate Dolby B Noise
Reduction. Push again to deactivate.
*[AS18260(ALL)08/95]
*[AS18280(ALL)08/95]
Tape error messages
[AS18325(ALL)04/95]
TD E1 — Possible problem tape cartridge. The
cassette player will automatically eject the tape.
Insert the tape again. If the same error code
appears in the display, try a different tape. If the
problem persists, refer the problem to qualified
personnel for service.
[AS18330(ALL)04/95]
TD E2 — Radio cannot eject tape. If tape is not
ejected when the “EJ” button is pressed, refer
the problem to qualified personnel for service.
NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Your cassette tape player is equipped to
diagnose certain problems you may experience.
Error codes are as follows:
180
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
[AS18350(ALL)12/95]
TD E3 — Radio cannot insert tape properly. The
cassette player will automatically eject the tape.
Insert tape again. If the same error code appears
in the display, try a different tape. If the
problem persists, refer the problem to qualified
personnel for service.
*[AS18500(ALL)08/95]
Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and
Tapes
*[AS18600(ALL)08/95]
In order to keep your cassette tape player
performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS18700(ALL)08/95]
❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to
*[AS18800(ALL)08/95]
❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or
*[AS18900(ALL)08/95]
❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct
*[AS19000(ALL)08/95]
❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it
*[AS19100(ALL)08/95]
❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become
*[AS19200(ALL)08/95]
❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape
clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
before playing by putting your finger or a
pencil into one of the holes and turning the
hub until the tape is tight.
lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting cassette.
player. High heat in the vehicle can cause the
cassette to warp.
181
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
%
Ford 6-CD Changer
[AS29401(ALL)04/95]
The Ford 6-CD Changer is in the left of the
trunk or the right of the cargo area. It is
controlled by the audio system buttons.
*[AS29450(ALL)02/95]
Loading Instructions
[AS29500(ALL)04/95]
1.
*[AS29351(ALL)02/95]
Open the cover door. Open Compact Disc
Changer trunk unit by sliding door to the
front (sedan) or rear (wagon) (Figure 1).
[AS29550(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001464-A
Figure 1
[AS29601(ALL)02/95]
2.
Press the orange Eject button to eject the disc
“magazine” (holds 6 discs) (Figure 2).
[AS29650(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001465-A
Figure 2
182
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
[AS29701(ALL)02/95]
3.
Load discs into the disc magazine slots
(numbered 1 through 6 on the window) one
at a time with labeled surfaces upward,
starting with bottom slot number 1
(Figure 3).
[AS29750(ALL)10/95]
one third page art:0001466-B
Figure 3
To remove a compact disc from the disc
magazine, slide the corresponding lever on
the opposite side of the magazine window.
The disc will partially eject.
[AS29775(ALL)04/95]
[AS29800(ALL)02/95]
4.
Insert loaded disc magazine into changer
unit with the arrow on top of the disc
magazine pointing toward the changer
(Figure 4). Make sure magazine is fully
inserted into changer.
[AS29850(ALL)04/95]
quarter page art:0001467-A
Figure 4
[AS29950(ALL)02/95]
5.
Close unit by sliding changer panel door to
the rear (sedan) or front (wagon).
183
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
[AS30001(ALL)02/95]
The Compact Disc Changer unit is now ready to
play using the controls of your audio system.
*[AS30050(ALL)02/95]
How to Operate the Ford 6-CD Changer
Using the Controls on the Radio
[AS30101(ALL)02/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford 6-CD
Changer System, you can operate it through the
controls of your audio system.
*[AS30150(ALL)05/95]
Several of the controls on the radio operate in
the same manner in CD mode as they do in
radio or cassette mode: turning the power on,
volume control and adjusting the bass, treble,
speaker balance or fade.
*[AS30201(ALL)02/95]
*[AS30250(ALL)02/95]
How to begin CD Changer play
[AS30301(ALL)04/95]
Push the “CD” button to begin CD play. If the
disc magazine has just been installed, the CD
Changer will automatically begin playing the
first track (selection) of the first disc loaded in
the unit. After that, the CD Changer will start
on the disc and track where it was stopped. The
display will indicate “CD-##” for disc number,
then display “TR-##” for track number, then
“DD-TT” for disc number and track number.
[AS30325(ALL)04/95]
If the CD Changer is empty, “NO” and “CD”
will flash in the display and radio play will
continue.
*[AS30350(ALL)02/95]
How to change the disc being played
[AS30401(ALL)02/95]
When in the CD mode, you can change discs by
pressing the right (a) side of the “TUNE/DISC”
button (to select the next disc) or the left (b)
side of the “TUNE/DISC” button (to select the
previous disc). Play will begin on the first track
of the selected disc.
NOTE: Radio power must be on to operate the
Compact Disc Changer.
184
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS30450(ALL)02/95]
When either side of the button is pressed and
held, the CD changer will continue
fast-forwarding or reversing through the discs in
the disc magazine. During these functions, the
display will indicate the disc number.
*[AS30501(ALL)10/95]
*[AS30550(ALL)02/95]
How to change the track being played
*[AS30601(ALL)02/95]
Press the left (b) side of the SEEK button to
seek in reverse to the previous track on the
current disc. If a selection has been playing for
three seconds or more and you press the left
(b) side of the SEEK button, the CD Changer
will replay that selection from the beginning.
[AS30625(ALL)04/95]
Using fast forward or reverse
[AS30651(ALL)04/95]
To quickly search for a particular point in a
selection, press and hold the “FF” or “REW”
button. Find the desired point by watching the
elapsed playing time in the display or listening
to the sound, then release the button.
*[AS30800(ALL)02/95]
*[AS30851(ALL)02/95]
Operating the Shuffle feature
[AS30900(ALL)02/95]
Press the “SHUFFLE” button to turn on, press it
again to turn off. When on, the display will
indicate “SHUF” then the disc and track number
(dd-tt).
Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to
seek forward to the next track of current disc.
After the last track has been completed, the CD
player automatically wraps back to the first track
of the current disc.
The shuffle feature on your CD player allows
you to listen to your disc selections in a different
order. When this feature is activated, your CD
player will randomly select and play tracks on
the disc.
185
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS30951(ALL)02/95]
*[AS31000(ALL)02/95]
Operating the “SCAN” function
*[AS31051(ALL)02/95]
Operating the Shuffle and Scan features
simultaneously
*[AS31101(ALL)02/95]
Both the shuffle and scan features can be
activated simultaneously. In this mode, the
player will randomly pick a selection and play
the first eight seconds. This process is continued
until either the “SCAN” button or “SHUFFLE”
button is pressed a second time.
*[AS31110(ALL)04/95]
*[AS31120(ALL)04/95]
Operating the CD Compression feature
[AS31130(ALL)04/95]
To turn the compression on, press the “COMP”
button. When the compression feature is
activated, the display will indicate “C”. Press
again to deactivate.
*[AS31150(ALL)02/95]
How to stop CD play
[AS31200(ALL)04/95]
While in CD Changer mode, press the “AM” or
“FM” button to stop CD play and resume radio
play. Loading a cassette into the cassette deck
(or pressing “TAPE” if a cassette is already
loaded) will stop CD play and begin cassette
play.
Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan
mode. The CD player will begin scanning the
disc, stopping on each listenable track for
approximately an eight second sampling. This
continues until you press the “SCAN” button a
second time.
The compression feature will bring soft and loud
passages closer together for a more consistent
listening level.
186
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
%
How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD
Player and Discs
*[AS32312(ALL)08/95]
To ensure the continued performance of your
Ford Compact Disc Player, carefully read the
following precautions:
*[AS32314(ALL)08/95]
❑ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never
*[AS32316(ALL)08/95]
❑ Before playing, inspect the disc for any
*[AS32318(ALL)08/95]
❑ Do not clean discs with solvents such as
*[AS32320(ALL)08/95]
❑ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or
*[AS32322(ALL)08/95]
*[AS32324(ALL)08/95]
❑ After playing, store the disc in its case.
❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try
*[AS32326(ALL)08/95]
❑ Do not insert anything other than a disc into
*[AS32310(ALL)08/95]
touch the playing surface.
contamination. If needed, clean the disc with
an approved disc cleaner, such as the
DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the
Allsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping
from the center out to the edges. Do not use
a circular motion to clean.
benzine, thinner, commercially available
cleaners or antistatic spray intended for
analog records.
heat sources such as defroster and floor
heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a
parked car in direct sunlight where there may
be a considerable rise in temperature or
damage may result.
to insert another disc. Doing so may damage
the disc player.
the disc player.
187
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS32328(ALL)08/95]
CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with
this product will increase eye hazard as the laser
beam used in this compact disc player is
harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to
disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
*[AS32330(ALL)08/95]
Common Operating Conditions of Your
CD Player
*[AS32332(ALL)08/95]
The following information is designed to help
you recognize typical situations that could be
mistakenly interpreted as mechanical
malfunctions of the disc player.
*[AS32336(ALL)08/95]
❑ The disc is inserted with the label surface
*[AS32338(ALL)08/95]
*[AS32340(ALL)08/95]
❑ The disc is dusty or defective.
❑ The player’s internal temperature is above
*[AS32342(ALL)08/95]
❑ Different manufacturers of compact discs may
*[AS32344(ALL)09/95]
If play does not begin after the CD button is
pushed:
*[AS32345(ALL)08/95]
❑ The radio is not on.
❑ The disc magazine is not fully seated in
[AS32346(ALL)02/95]
downward.
140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool off
before operating.
produce discs with different dimensions or
tolerances, some of which may not be within
industry standards or in accordance with the
CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is
free of dust and scratches could be defective
and may not play on your Ford Compact
Disc Player.
changer.
*[AS32348(ALL)08/95]
❑ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses
within the unit. If this occurs, remove the
disc and wait approximately an hour until the
moisture evaporates.
188
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
*[AS32350(ALL)08/95]
*[AS32352(ALL)08/95]
If the sound skips:
*[AS32400(ALL)02/95]
CD Error Messages
[AS32500(ALL)02/95]
Your system is equipped to diagnose certain
problems you may experience. The displayed
error codes are:
[AS32600(ALL)02/95]
NO then CD — Empty slot or magazine,
mechanical error, disc(s) unreadable, or
mechanism focus error. Check all discs in the
magazine for scratches and proper insertion. If
problem persists, refer problem to qualified
personnel for service.
[AS32700(ALL)02/95]
NO then DJ — CD Changer not connected or
not communicating to audio system. Refer
problem to qualified personnel for service.
[AS32800(ALL)04/95]
TOO then HOT — The changer’s internal
temperature is above 140˚F (60˚C). Allow the
player to cool before operating.
❑ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough
roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping
will not damage the disc player or scratch the
discs.
189
File:09fcast.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996
%
*[AS37000(ALL)08/95]
*[AS37050(ALL)07/90]
*[AS37100(ALL)08/95]
*[AS37150(ALL)07/90]
*[AS37200(ALL)08/95]
Important Warranty and Service
Information
❑ Warranty
Your sound system is warranted for three years
or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever
comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty
booklet for further information. Ask your dealer
for a copy of this limited warranty.
❑ Service
At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio
systems with a comprehensive service and repair
program. If anything should go wrong with
your Ford audio system, return to your dealer
for service. There is a nationwide network of
qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist
you.
190
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
Driving Your Taurus
*[DR00300(ALL)07/95]
Your vehicle will have one of the following
types of transaxles:
*[DR00500(ALL)11/94]
❑ an automatic overdrive transaxle, or
❑ an automatic overdrive transaxle with
[DR00510(ALL)02/95]
Overdrive Off (O/D OFF) switch
*[DR00700(ALL)11/94]
If you are not sure which transaxle your vehicle
has, talk to your dealer.
*[DR00800(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic
Powertrain Control Module that limits engine
and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode to
promote durability.
% [DR03510(ALL)04/95]
Driving with an Automatic
Overdrive Transaxle (Column
Gearshift without O/D OFF
Switch)
*[DR03600(ALL)04/95]
%
Your automatic overdrive transaxle provides
fully automatic operation in either j
(Overdrive) or D (Drive). Driving with the shift
selector in j (Overdrive) gives the best fuel
economy for normal driving conditions. For
manual control, start in 1 (First) and then shift
manually.
191
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR03800(ALL)01/95]
*[DR04001(ALL)05/95]
%
Putting Your Vehicle in Gear
RWARNING
Hold the brake pedal down while you
move the gearshift lever from position to
position. If you do not hold the brake
pedal down, your vehicle may move
unexpectedly and injure someone.
*[DR04050(ALL)03/95]
*[DR04101(ALL)01/95]
*[DR04150(ALL)01/95]
*[DR04201(ALL)01/95]
% [DR04250(ALL)04/95]
*
To operate:
*[DR04300(ALL)01/95]
1.
Turn the engine off and remove the ignition
key.
[DR04350(ALL)11/94]
2.
Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwise
to the first position (OFF).
[DR04400(ALL)11/94]
3.
Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift
lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.
*[DR04425(ALL)07/95]
If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the
alternate procedure described above, it is
possible that a fuse has blown and that your
brakelamps may also not be functional. Please
refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Taurus
in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking
and replacing fuses.
1.
Start the engine.
2.
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3.
Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).
Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift
Interlock safety feature. This feature prevents the
gearshift from being moved from the P (Park)
position until the brake pedal is depressed. This
feature is active when the ignition is in the ON
position. If the gearshift lever CANNOT be
moved from P (Park) with the brake pedal
depressed:
192
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR04451(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL
YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS
ARE WORKING.
*[DR04501(ALL)11/94]
*[DR04550(ALL)04/95]
%
Using a column-mounted gearshift
If your gearshift is on the column, you can use
any of the following positions:
[DR04601(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000491-E
The column-mounted gearshift
*[DR04650(ALL)01/95]
Once you place the gearshift securely into
position, gradually release the brake pedal and
use the accelerator as necessary.
*[DR05100(ALL)01/95]
*[DR05200(ALL)08/95]
R (Reverse)
*[DR05250(ALL)01/95]
*[DR05275(ALL)01/95]
N (Neutral)
%
With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,
the vehicle will move backward. You should
always come to a complete stop before shifting
into or out of R (Reverse).
With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position,
the vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
193
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR05300(ALL)01/95]
% [DR05400(ALL)04/95]
*
*[DR05500(ALL)04/95]
Driving
*[DR05600(ALL)04/95]
However, j (Overdrive) also shifts into a fourth
gear — an overdrive gear — when your vehicle
cruises at a consistent speed for any length of
time. This fourth gear will increase your fuel
economy when you travel at cruising speeds.
*[DR05800(ALL)06/95]
When to use D (Drive)
[DR06000(ALL)12/95]
D (Drive) eliminates the excessive shifting
between third and fourth gears that your vehicle
sometimes does when you are traveling through
hilly terrain in j (Overdrive). It also provides
more engine braking than j (Overdrive) for
descending hills or city driving.
*[DR06100(ALL)06/95]
*[DR06200(ALL)11/94]
When to use 1 (First)
*[DR06220(ALL)11/94]
The automatic transaxle will shift to the proper
gear to ascend any grade without any need to
shift to 1 (First).
[DR06300(ALL)04/95]
Do not go faster than 38 mph (61 km/h) in this
gear. You can upshift from 1 (First) to D (Drive)
or from 1 (First) to j (Overdrive) at any speed.
*[DR06400(ALL)01/95]
*[DR06500(ALL)11/94]
P (Park)
%
When to use j (Overdrive)
j (Overdrive) is the usual driving position for
an automatic overdrive transaxle. It works the
same way D (Drive) works, automatically
upshifting or downshifting as the vehicle speeds
or slows.
Use 1 (First) when added engine braking is
desired when descending steep hills.
Always come to a complete stop before you shift
into P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park). This locks the
transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
rotating.
194
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR06600(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the gearshift is securely latched
in P (Park).
*[DR06625(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Never leave your vehicle unattended
while it is running.
[DR06700(ALL)11/94]
You can tell a column-mounted gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park) if you cannot move
it without pulling it toward you and rotating it
downward.
% [DR06705(ALL)04/95]
Driving with an Automatic
Overdrive Transaxle (Column or
Console Gearshift with O/D OFF
Switch)
[DR06710(ALL)02/95]
Your automatic overdrive transaxle provides
fully automatic operation in either D (Overdrive)
or with the O/D OFF Switch depressed. Driving
with the shift selector in D (Overdrive) gives the
best fuel economy for normal driving conditions.
For manual control, start in 1 (First) and then
shift manually.
%
Putting Your Vehicle in Gear
[DR06735(ALL)04/95]
You must push in the thumb button to move the
console-mounted gearshift to the position you
choose.
[DR06740(ALL)02/95]
To move the gearshift out of P (Park), the
ignition must be turned from the locked position
to either the OFF or the ON position.
*[DR06730(ALL)01/95]
195
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR06745(ALL)03/95]
*[DR06750(ALL)01/95]
*[DR06755(ALL)01/95]
*[DR06760(ALL)01/95]
% [DR06765(ALL)04/95]
*
To operate:
*[DR06770(ALL)01/95]
1.
Turn the engine off and remove the ignition
key.
[DR06775(ALL)11/94]
2.
Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwise
to the first position (OFF).
[DR06780(ALL)11/94]
3.
Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift
lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.
*[DR06781(ALL)07/95]
If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the
alternate procedure described above, it is
possible that a fuse has blown and that your
brakelamps may also not be functional. Please
refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Taurus
in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking
and replacing fuses.
*[DR06783(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
1.
Start the engine.
2.
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3.
Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).
Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift
Interlock safety feature. This feature prevents the
gearshift from being moved from the P (Park)
position until the brake pedal is depressed. This
feature is active when the ignition is in the ON
position. If the gearshift lever CANNOT be
moved from P (Park) with the brake pedal
depressed:
DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL
YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS
ARE WORKING.
196
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
[DR06785(ALL)04/95]
Using the gearshift
*[DR06787(ALL)04/95]
If your gearshift is on the column, you can use
any of the following positions:
% [DR06788(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0001435-A
The column-mounted gearshift
197
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
[DR06789(ALL)04/95]
If your gearshift is on the console, you can use
any of the following positions:
% [DR06790(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0001028-D
The console-mounted gearshift
*[DR06791(ALL)04/95]
The console-mounted gearshift will lock when
you turn the key to the LOCK position. When
the gearshift is in any position except P (Park),
the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK or
removed from the steering column. TO
REMOVE THE KEY, the gearshift lever must be
in P (Park).
*[DR06793(ALL)11/94]
Once the gearshift is secure in the desired
position, release the brake pedal and use the
accelerator as necessary.
*[DR06795(ALL)01/95]
*[DR06800(ALL)08/95]
R (Reverse)
%
With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,
the vehicle will move backward. You should
always come to a complete stop before shifting
into or out of R (Reverse).
198
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR06802(ALL)01/95]
*[DR06804(ALL)01/95]
N (Neutral)
*[DR06805(ALL)01/95]
% [DR06825(ALL)05/95]
*
*[DR06830(ALL)11/94]
Driving
*[DR06835(ALL)11/94]
However, D (Overdrive) also shifts into a fourth
gear — an overdrive gear — when your vehicle
cruises at a consistent speed for any length of
time. This fourth gear will increase your fuel
economy when you travel at cruising speeds.
[DR07025(ALL)04/95]
When to use D (O/D OFF)
[DR07050(ALL)12/95]
You will notice that there is only one drive
position on your gearshift indicator (instead of
Drive and Overdrive). However, you will find a
switch labeled O/D located on the gearshift
lever. Push in the switch and the O/D OFF light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate. With
the O/D OFF light illuminated, the transaxle
will operate in first, second and third gears and
will not shift into fourth gear. Operating in D
(O/D OFF) eliminates the excessive shifting
between third and fourth gears that your vehicle
sometimes does when you are traveling through
hilly terrain in D (Overdrive). It also provides
more engine braking than D (Overdrive) for
descending hills or city driving.
[DR07075(ALL)04/95]
To return the transaxle to the normal Overdrive
operation, press the O/D OFF switch again. Use
this switch to select Overdrive or D (O/D OFF)
whenever you drive your vehicle.
%
With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position,
the vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
When to use D (Overdrive)
D (Overdrive) is the usual driving position for
an automatic overdrive transaxle. It
automatically upshifts or downshifts as the
vehicle speeds or slows.
199
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
[DR08050(ALL)09/95]
*[DR08075(ALL)10/95]
NOTE: If the O/D OFF indicator light is
flashing on and off repeatedly when
the vehicle is started or does not come
on when the O/D OFF switch is
pushed, it means that there is a
transaxle electronic system malfunction.
You should contact your dealer as soon
as possible or damage to the transaxle
could occur.
The transaxle will be in the “overdrive on”
mode when the vehicle is started even if the
O/D OFF mode was selected when the vehicle
was last shut off.
*[DR09025(ALL)01/95]
When to use 2 (Second)
[DR09050(ALL)11/94]
Use Second for start-up on slippery roads or to
give you more engine braking to slow your
vehicle on downgrades.
*[DR09075(ALL)06/95]
*[DR10025(ALL)11/94]
When to use 1 (First)
Use 1 (First) when added engine braking is
desired when descending steep hills.
*[DR10050(ALL)11/94]
The automatic transaxle will shift to the proper
gear to ascend any grade without any need to
shift to 1 (First).
[DR10075(ALL)11/94]
Do not go faster than 38 mph (61 km/h) in this
gear. You can upshift from 1 (First) to D
(Overdrive) at any speed.
*[DR10125(ALL)01/95]
*[DR10150(ALL)11/94]
P (Park)
[DR10160(ALL)04/95]
If your vehicle has a console mounted gearshift,
the gearshift indicator in the cluster is
illuminated in P (Park) only when the gearshift
button is released.
Always come to a complete stop before you shift
into P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park). This locks the
transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
rotating.
200
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR10175(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the gearshift is securely latched
in P (Park).
*[DR10225(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Never leave your vehicle unattended
while it is running.
[DR10275(ALL)11/94]
You can tell a console-mounted gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park) if you cannot move
it without pushing in the thumb button.
*[DR15600(ALL)01/95]
% [DR15800(ALL)01/95]
*
Steering Your Vehicle
%
[DR15970(ALL)11/94]
Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power
steering uses energy from the engine to help
steer your vehicle.
Your vehicle has variable-assist steering. This
system provides light power steering efforts for
parking and heavier power steering efforts for
highway driving. If you notice that the power
steering effort does not change according to the
speed you are traveling, or if the power steering
system is not working, have the system checked.
%
If the amount of effort needed to steer your
vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have
the power steering system checked. If the power
steering system breaks down (or if the engine is
turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually
but it takes more effort.
*[DR16150(ALL)01/95]
Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme
right or left for more than five seconds if the
engine is running. This can damage the power
steering pump.
*[DR16100(ALL)04/95]
201
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
[DR16170( T)10/95]
Semi-Active Ride Control
(SHO only)
[DR16190( T)12/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a semi-active ride
control suspension system. Ride and handling is
enhanced by firm shock absorber performance
during certain road conditions and handling
maneuvers. The shock absorber is returned to a
softer performance when driver or road surface
induced motion ceases. This system is automatic
with no direct driver input required.
*[DR16200(ALL)03/95]
% [DR16300(ALL)01/95]
*
*[DR16450(ALL)05/95]
Brakes
%
Applying the Brakes
Your vehicle may have four-wheel power
anti-lock disc brakes which adjust automatically
through everyday use.
*[DR16500(ALL)05/95]
Some models have power front disc brakes and
rear drum brakes which automatically adjust as
the brake pads and linings wear down.
*[DR16700(ALL)05/95]
If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes,
apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the
“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal
with a steadily increasing force. This allows the
wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing
down, which lets you steer properly.
*[DR16800(ALL)05/95]
If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes,
extreme braking can make the wheels lock and
slide, causing you to lose control of the steering.
If the wheels lock, release the brake pedal and
repeat the “squeeze” technique.
*[DR16900(ALL)05/95]
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
pedal; you will wear out the linings and increase
your vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotor
damage may also eventually occur.
202
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR17000(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If you are driving down a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do
not apply your brakes continuously. If
you apply your brakes continuously,
they may overheat and become less
effective.
%
Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate
stops does not affect the function of the brake
system and is normal. However, if the squeal
becomes louder or more frequent, have your
brakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
% [DR17350(ALL)02/95]
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(If equipped)
*[DR17450(ALL)05/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lock
brake system (ABS), the wheels will not lock and
slide when you press down hard on the brake
pedal. The ABS automatically starts releasing
and reapplying the front brakes independently
and the rear brakes together whenever your
vehicle’s wheels start to lock. When this
happens, you will feel the brake pedal pulsate.
This is an indication that the ABS is working
correctly and is normal.
*[DR17500(ALL)05/95]
If the brake pedal is applied while the vehicle is
driven over uneven road surfaces, the ABS may
cycle and the driver may sense a pulsation in
the brake pedal, accompanied by a slight up and
down movement of the pedal height and a
clicking sound. This may also happen when
driving on an inclined surface such as a
driveway while making a sharp turn. This is a
normal condition.
*[DR17100(ALL)10/95]
203
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR17600(ALL)05/95]
Each time you turn the ignition key to the ON
position, the ABS will function through one test
cycle. When this happens, the ABS light will
come on for up to five seconds. If the light stays
on longer than five seconds, shut off the engine
and restart. If it remains on, it means the ABS is
disabled and should be serviced immediately to
restore the benefits of the anti-lock feature.
Normal braking is not affected unless the red
BRAKE system warning light is also lit.
*[DR17650(ALL)05/95]
ABS has self-check capabilities. As described
above, the system turns on the ABS light each
time you start your engine. After the engine is
started and the ABS light turns off, the system
performs another test the first time the vehicle
reaches 4-9 mph (6-15 km/h). The system turns
on the ABS pump motor for approximately 1/2
second. At this time, a mechanical noise may be
heard. This is a normal part of the self-check
feature. If a malfunction is found during this
check the ABS light will come on.
[DR17675(ALL)02/95]
Vehicles with ABS are identified with a label on
the front door pillar.
*[DR17700(ALL)08/95]
Ford Motor Company has not found any
negative effects of mobile radio transmitting
equipment installed on vehicles with the ABS
system providing that the radio is installed
according to the radio manufacturer’s
instructions. However, if you have had a mobile
radio transmitter installed and the ABS light
comes on (at any time other than immediately
after turning the key to the ON position) have
your mobile radio dealer inspect the radio
installation. Also, if the ABS system is activated
other than during maximum braking, have your
mobile radio installation checked.
204
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR17800(ALL)03/95]
*[DR17900(ALL)01/95]
Parking Brake
[DR18000(ALL)01/95]
This brake is suspended just below the bottom
of the instrument panel to the left of the brake
pedal.
%
The parking brake should be used whenever
you park your vehicle.
[DR18300(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0001391-A
The parking brake and parking brake release
*[DR18420(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the gearshift is securely latched
in P (Park).
*[DR18700(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
If the parking brake is fully released, but
the Brake System light remains on, have
the brakes checked immediately. They
may not be working properly.
*[DR18750(ALL)11/91]
RWARNING
To prevent personal injury, do not release
the parking brake while outside the
vehicle.
205
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR19000(ALL)06/95]
The parking brake is not designed to stop a
moving vehicle, but you can use the parking
brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if
the normal brakes fail. However, since the
parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the
stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely
affected.
*[DR19050(ALL)03/95]
Always check the Brake Warning Light each
time you start your engine. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear
out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.
*[DR19100(ALL)01/95]
% [DR19200(ALL)01/95]
*
*[DR19300(ALL)07/95]
Driving Under Special Conditions
%
Tips for Safe Driving
As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and
handle differently from your previous vehicle.
Use care until you become accustomed to its
various features and driving characteristics.
*[DR19400(ALL)03/95]
Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.
Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, or
combinations of these maneuvers can cause a
vehicle to behave differently than anticipated.
*[DR19750(ALL)01/95]
% [DR19800(ALL)01/95]
*
*[DR19900(ALL)03/95]
Driving in Bad Weather
%
Slippery roads
On some slippery road surfaces, front-wheel
drive may provide better acceleration than
rear-wheel drive. However, this does not mean
that your vehicle can stop any faster or any
better than a vehicle with rear-wheel drive.
Exercise the same caution while driving on
slippery roads with your front-wheel drive
vehicle as you would with a rear-wheel drive
vehicle.
206
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR20100(ALL)03/95]
❑ Do not quickly move the steering wheel
*[DR20200(ALL)01/95]
*[DR20400(ALL)01/95]
*[DR20500(ALL)03/92]
❑ Drive slower than you normally would.
❑ Give your vehicle more distance to stop.
❑ Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to
*[DR20600(ALL)02/93]
*[DR20750(ALL)07/95]
❑ Consider using one of the lower gears.
unless necessary.
avoid locking your wheels. (Does not apply
to vehicles with anti-lock brakes.)
RWARNING
To avoid skidding and losing control on
slippery roads, do not downshift into 1
(First) when you are moving faster than
20 mph (30 km/h).
*[DR20775(ALL)03/95]
RWARNING
If your vehicle has speed control, do not
use it on slippery roads. You could lose
control of your vehicle and could injure
someone.
*[DR20850(ALL)01/95]
If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud
or snow), you may try to “rock” it out of the
spot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward
and reverse gears. While in each gear, press
lightly on the accelerator and release.
*[DR20900(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
207
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR21000(ALL)03/95]
By moving the vehicle backward and forward,
you may gain enough momentum to move out
of the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. This may overheat the
engine, damage the transaxle, or damage the
tires. If you are still stuck after a minute or two
of rocking, call for a tow truck.
*[DR21200(ALL)01/95]
*[DR21300(ALL)01/95]
High water
*[DR21400(ALL)04/94]
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. You may have limited traction or wet
brakes, so allow extra stopping distance because
your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.
*[DR21500(ALL)01/95]
After you drive through the standing water,
apply your brakes gently several times as your
vehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry the
brakes.
*[DR21600(ALL)03/95]
*[DR21700(ALL)01/95]
Driving With a Heavy Load
%
%
*[DR21800(ALL)01/95]
%
Do not drive through flooded areas unless you
are sure that the water is below the bottom of
the wheel rims.
There are limits to the amount of weight your
vehicle can carry or tow. The total weight of
your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers
and cargo, should never be more than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight
that your vehicle carries over the front axle and
rear axle should never be more than the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective
axle.
You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on
the left front door lock facing or on the door
latch post pillar.
208
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR21900(ALL)08/95]
The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect
the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of
replacement tires with higher weight limits than
originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.
Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may
lower GVWR and GAWR limitations.
*[DR22000(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged
or you may lose control and injure
someone.
*[DR22005(ALL)01/95]
*[DR22010(ALL)01/95]
Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load
*[DR22015(ALL)01/95]
To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add
the weights of:
*[DR22020(ALL)01/95]
*[DR22025(ALL)01/95]
❑ the driver and passengers
❑ luggage and any other items that you put in
*[DR22030(ALL)01/95]
*[DR22035(ALL)01/95]
❑ the tongue load of the loaded trailer
❑ the weight of any equipment that has been
%
The load that you add to your vehicle must not
exceed the maximum load stated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Decal attached to the
left front door pillar.
your vehicle
added to your vehicle since it was delivered
to your dealer
209
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR22040(ALL)01/95]
If you do not know the actual weights of these
items, use the following procedure to figure the
weight of a load:
*[DR22045(ALL)01/95]
1.
Weigh your vehicle without the driver,
passengers and luggage. You might take
your vehicle to a shipping company or an
inspection station for trucks.
*[DR22050(ALL)01/95]
2.
Then weigh your vehicle with the driver,
passengers and luggage.
*[DR22055(ALL)01/95]
3.
Subtract the first reading from the second to
figure the total weight of the load.
*[DR22060(ALL)01/95]
After determining this load, you must also make
sure that the total weight of your vehicle, plus
the load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also,
make sure that the weight your vehicle carries
over each axle is less than the GAWR for the
respective axle.
*[DR22065(ALL)01/95]
You can find the GVWR and GAWR on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label on the left
front door lock facing or the door latch post
pillar.
*[DR22070(ALL)01/95]
If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo
from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle
exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load
or remove cargo accordingly.
210
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
%
Trailer Towing
[DR22125(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing
vehicle. The amount of weight that you can
safely tow depends on the type of engine in
your vehicle. See the following charts:
*[DR22100(ALL)04/95]
[DR22150(ALL)04/95]
sixteen pica chart:0000489-H
[DR22190(ALL)10/95]
fourteen pica chart:0001436-C
211
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR22200(ALL)01/95]
Your vehicle does not come from the factory
fully equipped to tow. No towing packages are
available through Ford or Lincoln/Mercury
dealers.
*[DR22300(ALL)01/95]
Because towing a trailer puts extra strain on
your vehicle, you must follow certain
precautions for your safety and the good of your
vehicle:
*[DR25800(ALL)11/92]
❑ Stay within the load limits when you tow.
*[DR25900(ALL)01/95]
❑ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your
*[DR26000(ALL)01/95]
❑ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle
*[DR26100(ALL)01/95]
❑ Service your vehicle more frequently if you
*[DR26150(ALL)05/94]
Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been
driven at least 500 miles (800 km).
(See Knowing Your Vehicle’s Load Limits.)
vehicle for towing, making sure to use the
right equipment and to attach it properly.
(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)
while you tow. (See Driving while you tow in
this chapter.)
tow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if you
tow in this chapter.)
212
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR26500(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Towing trailers beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer weight exceeds
the limits of the vehicle and could result
in engine damage, transaxle/axle damage,
structural damage, loss of control, and
personal injury.
*[DR26580(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not tow a trailer when the temporary
spare tire is being used.
*[DR26600(ALL)01/95]
Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight should
be on the tongue. However, the tongue load
should never exceed 10% of the maximum
weight that your vehicle can safely tow.
*[DR28500(ALL)01/95]
*[DR28600(ALL)01/95]
Preparing to Tow
*[DR28700(ALL)01/95]
Do not use hitches that clamp onto your
vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed to
bear the load.
For your safety and for the good of your
vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of
trailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towing
equipment is properly attached to your vehicle.
If you are not certain that you are using the
right equipment in the proper manner, see your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
213
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR28750(ALL)01/95]
*[DR28800(ALL)05/94]
Using the hitch
*[DR28900(ALL)01/95]
Tie down the load so that it does not shift and
change the weight on the hitch. This will
prevent damage to your vehicle and make your
vehicle easier to handle.
*[DR28950(ALL)01/95]
*[DR29000(ALL)01/95]
Connecting the safety chains
*[DR29100(ALL)01/95]
*[DR29200(ALL)01/95]
To connect the trailer’s safety chains:
1.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue
and attach them to your vehicle’s frame or
hook retainers. Never attach the safety
chains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper
is not designed to bear the weight of a
trailer.
*[DR29300(ALL)01/95]
2.
Make sure that you leave enough slack in
the chains to allow you to turn corners.
*[DR29400(ALL)01/95]
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions
that the rental agency gives you.
%
%
Your vehicle uses a load carrying hitch. Because
this type of hitch places the tongue load of a
trailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle, you
must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10 to 15% of the total weight of the trailer is on
the tongue.
Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to your
vehicle. They help protect your trailer if the
hitch breaks.
214
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR29450(ALL)01/95]
*[DR29500(ALL)01/95]
%
*[DR29600(ALL)05/95]
Connecting the trailer’s brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic, or
surge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them according
to the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure that
your trailer’s brakes meet local and federal
regulations.
RWARNING
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake
system directly to your vehicle’s brake
system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances
of having a collision greatly increase.
*[DR29650(ALL)01/95]
*[DR29700(ALL)01/95]
Connecting the trailer’s lights
*[DR29800(ALL)01/95]
If you do not install trailer lights correctly, you
may cause damage to the vehicle’s lighting
system.
%
Do not connect a trailer’s lighting system
wiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting system
wiring. To get the proper equipment for
hooking up your trailer’s lights, see your local
trailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure to
follow their instructions carefully.
215
File:10fcdrt.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996
*[DR29900(ALL)01/95]
*[DR30000(ALL)05/95]
Driving While You Tow
[DR30175(ALL)04/95]
When you tow in steep hills, move the
automatic transaxle to 1 (First) (vehicles without
O/D OFF switch) or 2 (Second) (vehicles with
O/D OFF switch) when descending. This will
give more engine braking on downgrades. The
automatic transaxle will automatically downshift
to the proper gear on upgrades.
[DR30200(ALL)04/95]
If you tow in Overdrive while riding through
hilly country, your vehicle may frequently shift
between Overdrive and Third gears. To prevent
your vehicle from shifting too much, move the
gearshift to D (Drive) (column shift without
O/D OFF switch) or push the O/D OFF switch
(column or console shift). This will also give
better braking going down hills.
%
Be especially careful when driving while you
tow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country on
hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can
brake gradually.
%
If you use the speed control while you are
towing on very long, steep grades, the speed
control may shut off.
% [DR30400(ALL)04/95]
Servicing Your Vehicle When You Tow
*[DR30500(ALL)08/93]
If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your
vehicle will need to be serviced more frequently
than usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and
Record booklet for additional information.
*[DR30300(ALL)01/95]
216
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
Roadside Emergencies
%
If Your Vehicle Needs a
Jump-Start
*[RE00320(ALL)08/95]
Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the
lights on or any electrical equipment on after
you turn the engine off. If this happens, you
may be able to jump-start your vehicle with a
booster battery.
*[RE00310(ALL)03/95]
*[RE00400(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
The gases around the battery can explode
if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit
cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
*[RE00500(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
To protect yourself when charging a
battery, always shield your face and eyes.
Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.
*[RE00700(ALL)06/95]
%
RWARNING
Applying too much pressure on the ends
when lifting a battery could cause acid to
spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or
with your hands on the opposite corners.
*[RE00800(ALL)07/95]
%
RWARNING
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns
skin, eyes, and clothing.
217
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE00850(ALL)07/95]
If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or
clothing, immediately flush the area with water
for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the
acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water
first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or
vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.
*[RE00900(ALL)03/95]
To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,
and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these
directions for preparing your vehicle to
jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in
the order they are given. If in doubt, call for
road service.
*[RE01000(ALL)03/95]
*[RE01100(ALL)03/95]
Preparing Your Vehicle
1.
Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so
you need to use a 12-volt jumper system.
You will damage your starting motor,
ignition system, and other electrical parts if
you connect them to a 24-volt power supply
(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt generator set).
*[RE01200(ALL)03/95]
2.
Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s
electrical system.
*[RE01300(ALL)04/95]
3.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of
the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles
do not touch each other. Set the parking
brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the
engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
*[RE01400(ALL)03/95]
4.
Check all battery terminals and remove any
excessive corrosion before you attach the
jumper cables.
[RE01500(ALL)04/95]
5.
Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. If
you have electronic climate control, press the
V F-DEF button. Turn off all other switches
and lights.
218
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE01700(ALL)05/95]
*[RE02500(ALL)03/95]
Connecting the jumper cables
1.
Connect one end of the first jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery. (You can connect either jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you
use the same cable for both positive
terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red
cable and a black cable. The red cable is
generally used for the positive terminals and
the black for the negative ones.
*[RE02600(ALL)04/95]
2.
Connect the other end of the first cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the booster
battery.
*[RE02700(ALL)07/95]
3.
Connect one end of the second cable to the
negative (S) terminal of the booster battery
— NOT to the discharged battery.
*[RE02800(ALL)04/95]
4.
Connect the other end of the second cable to
a good metallic surface on the engine or
frame of the disabled vehicle.
%
*[RE02900(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (S) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause
an explosion of the gases that surround
the battery.
219
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
[RE03100(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0000388-D
Jumper cable connections
[RE03200( T)02/95]
half page art:0000390-C
The 3.4L SHO engine
220
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE03400(ALL)03/95]
*[RE03600(ALL)03/95]
Jump-Starting
1.
Make sure that the jumper cables are not in
the way of moving engine parts, then start
the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a
moderate speed.
*[RE03700(ALL)03/95]
2.
Let the discharged battery charge for a few
minutes and then start the disabled vehicle.
It may take a couple of tries before the
vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start
after several attempts, there may be a
different problem.
*[RE03800(ALL)03/95]
3.
When both vehicles are running, let them
idle for a few minutes to charge the
discharged battery.
*[RE03900(ALL)03/95]
*[RE04000(ALL)03/95]
Removing jumper cables
1.
Always remove the jumper cables in the
reverse order. Remove the negative (S) end
of the jumper cable from the metallic surface
on the engine or frame of the disabled
vehicle.
*[RE04100(ALL)06/95]
2.
Remove the negative (S) cable from the
booster battery.
*[RE04200(ALL)06/95]
3.
Remove the positive (+) cable from the
booster battery.
*[RE04300(ALL)05/95]
4.
Remove the other end of the positive (+)
cable from the discharged battery.
*[RE04400(ALL)11/95]
After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while
to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.
Drive it around for a while with all electrical
accessories turned off to let the battery recharge.
Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until all
drive modes are “relearned.” You may need to
use a battery charger to fully recharge the
battery.
%
221
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE04450(ALL)03/95]
If you need to replace your battery, see Battery
in the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter.
*[RE04500(ALL)03/95]
*[RE04600(ALL)01/95]
Changing a Tire
%
If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do
not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the
side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off
the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on
the hazard flashers.
[RE04610(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: Tire sealants that are injected through
the valve stem are not to be used to
service punctured tires because they
can produce wheel rust and tire
imbalance.
*[RE04700(ALL)03/95]
*[RE04800(ALL)03/95]
The Temporary Spare Tire
%
You may have a high pressure temporary spare
tire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire
and is designed for emergency use only. Use it
only when you get a flat tire and replace it as
soon as you can. This spare tire is marked with
the words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that
you can easily identify it.
*[RE04900(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
If you use the temporary spare tire
continuously or do not follow these
precautions, the tire could fail, causing
you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly
injuring yourself or others.
222
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE05000(ALL)01/95]
When you drive with the temporary spare tire,
DO NOT:
*[RE05100(ALL)01/95]
❑ exceed 50
*[RE05200(ALL)01/95]
❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than
*[RE05300(ALL)01/95]
*[RE05400(ALL)01/95]
*[RE05500(ALL)01/95]
❑ tow a trailer.
❑ use tire chains on this tire.
❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire or
*[RE05600(ALL)01/95]
*[RE05700(ALL)01/95]
❑ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.
❑ drive through an automatic car wash with
% [RE05800(ALL)11/94]
The Conventional Spare Tire (If equipped)
*[RE05900(ALL)01/95]
If you have the conventional spare tire, you can
use it as a spare or as a regular tire. This spare
tire is identical to the other tires that come with
your vehicle, although the wheel may not match.
mph (80 km/h) under any
circumstances.
the maximum vehicle load rating listed on
the tire decal.
remove it from its wheel.
this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is
smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces
the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get
caught in the rails and it could be damaged.
%
Spare Tire Location
[RE06100(ALL)04/95]
In a sedan, the spare tire is stored in the trunk
under the floor carpet.
*[RE06000(ALL)03/95]
223
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
[RE06200( T)12/95]
half page art:0000391-B
The spare tire in the SHO
[RE06250(ALL)02/95]
half page art:0001423-B
The spare tire in the sedan
224
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
[RE06300(ALL)11/94]
In the wagon, the temporary spare tire is stored
in the left side rear trim panel.
[RE06400(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0000392-B
The temporary spare tire in the wagon
[RE06700(ALL)11/94]
To remove the cover for the temporary spare
tire in the wagon:
[RE06800(ALL)04/95]
1.
Twist the three fasteners 90 degrees into a
vertical position.
[RE06900(ALL)02/95]
2.
Lift the the cover to disengage the three
retainers.
[RE07000(ALL)05/94]
3.
Pull the front of the cover out slightly and
remove the cover by sliding it toward the
front of the vehicle.
*[RE07100(ALL)01/89]
% [RE07400(ALL)03/95]
*
*[RE07500(ALL)05/94]
4.
Lift out the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
*[RE07600(ALL)03/95]
1.
Preparing to Change the Tire
You should only raise your vehicle with a jack
properly placed at the front or rear jacking
points.
Make sure that your vehicle will not move
or roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set the
parking brake and block the wheel that is
diagonally opposite the tire that you are
changing.
225
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
[RE07700(ALL)07/95]
When one of the front wheels is off the ground,
the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle
from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent the vehicle
from moving when you change a tire, block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the tire being changed.
*[RE08400(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
*[RE08800(ALL)03/95]
*[RE08850(ALL)05/95]
2.
Get out the spare tire and jack.
RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine
with one wheel off the ground, such as
when changing a tire.
% [RE08900(ALL)02/93]
3.
Remove wheel covers or aluminum wheel
ornaments with the tapered end of a wheel
nut wrench. Insert the handle of the wrench
between the wheel and ornament and twist
it against the inner wheel cover flange.
*[RE09200(ALL)09/95]
4.
Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove them
until the tire is raised off the ground. You
should pull up on the handle rather than
push to develop maximum force to loosen
wheel lug nuts. See Anti-Theft Wheel Lug
Nuts later in this chapter for information on
removing anti-theft lug nuts.
226
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE09250(ALL)05/95]
% [RE09300(ALL)11/94]
*
%
Removing and Replacing the Tire
1.
*[RE09500(ALL)05/95]
Find the jack notch next to the door of the
tire that you are changing. Put the jack in
the jack notch and turn the handle of the
jack clockwise until the wheel is completely
off the ground.
RWARNING
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start
the engine when your vehicle is on the
jack. The jack is only meant for changing
the tire.
[RE10000(ALL)02/95]
half page art:0000394-C
The notches for the jack
% [RE12000(ALL)11/94]
2.
Remove the lug nuts by using a lug wrench.
Never loosen the hub nuts. See the picture
later in this section if you are not sure where
to find the lug nuts.
227
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE12002(ALL)08/95]
Your vehicle has metric (12 mm) wheel studs
and lug nuts. During wheel removal and
replacement, make certain that you use the same
lug nuts to reinstall the wheel or replace them
with nuts of the same metric size and threading.
*[RE12005(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Installation of an English thread nut on a
metric stud (or vice-versa) will not
properly secure the wheel to the hub.
Damaged studs may result in wheel
separation and possible injury.
*[RE12100(ALL)01/95]
3.
Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure that the air valve stem is facing
outward.
*[RE12200(ALL)03/95]
4.
Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until the
wheel is snug against the hub. The beveled
edges on the lug nuts face inward. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower the
vehicle. If you do, you could force the
vehicle off the jack.
*[RE12300(ALL)01/95]
5.
Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
*[RE12400(ALL)01/95]
6.
Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown in the following
illustration. As soon as possible, have your
dealer or a qualified service technician check
the lug nuts for proper torque specifications.
228
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
% [RE12500(ALL)12/91]
one third page art:0000395-B
The lug nuts on the wheel
*[RE12600(ALL)01/95]
7.
Place any wheel covers and ornaments in the
trunk.
*[RE12700(ALL)03/95]
8.
Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Make
sure the jack is securely fastened so it does
not rattle when you drive.
*[RE12750(ALL)06/95]
9.
Unblock the wheels.
[RE13007(ALL)04/95]
Removing and Replacing Wheel Covers
[RE13008(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle may have wheel covers with a wire
retention system.
*[RE13009(ALL)03/95]
To remove the wheel cover:
[RE13010(ALL)04/95]
Pry it loose by carefully inserting the tapered
end of the jack handle between the wheel cover
and the wheel.
229
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE13011(ALL)04/95]
To replace the wheel cover:
[RE13012(ALL)04/95]
1.
One of the windows on the wheel cover is
identified with a valve stem logo on the
back side of the cover. Install the wheel
cover to the wheel with the window at the
valve stem.
[RE13013(ALL)04/95]
2.
Hold the wheel cover in this position and
press the cover onto the wheel with the
palm of your hand. Do not force or hammer
the cover.
*[RE13015(ALL)02/95]
*[RE13020(ALL)03/95]
Center Wheel Cover
[RE13022(ALL)11/94]
1.
Pry the center ornament off the wheelcover
with the lug wrench. Pry only at the notch.
Do not use a screwdriver or any other tool,
as this may damage the wheelcover or the
surface finish.
[RE13024(ALL)04/95]
2.
Remove the center bolt on the wheelcover
with the lug wrench tip.
[RE13026(ALL)11/94]
3.
To remove the wheelcover, pry it loose by
carefully inserting the tapered end of the lug
wrench between the wheelcover and wheel
at the outer edge.
[RE13028(ALL)11/94]
4.
To service the wheel or tire, remove the
pedestal by removing the lug nuts. Put the
pedestal in a safe place for reinstallation of
the wheelcover.
%
To remove the wheel cover:
230
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
[RE13040(ALL)11/94]
half page art:0000654-C
The center attachment wheel cover
*[RE13050(ALL)04/95]
To replace the wheel cover:
[RE13070(ALL)11/94]
1.
Reinstall the pedestal on the wheel before
reinstalling the wheelcover.
[RE13080(ALL)11/94]
2.
One of the windows on the wheelcover is
identified with a valve stem logo on the
inside of the cover. Align this valve hole on
the wheelcover with the valve stem on the
wheel. Reinstall the cover by pressing with
the palm of your hand. Do not use excessive
force. Do not use a hammer.
[RE13090(ALL)11/94]
3.
Attach the bolt to the pedestal through the
center hole in the cover with the lug wrench.
[RE14000(ALL)11/94]
4.
Align the legs of the center ornament with
the slots on the wheel cover. Reinstall the
ornament by pressing with the palm of your
hand. Do not use excessive force. Do not use
a hammer.
231
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
%
Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped)
[RE14200(ALL)03/95]
If your vehicle has this feature, one of the lug
nuts on each wheel lock must be removed and
replaced with a special key. The key and
registration card are attached to the lug wrench
and stored with the spare tire. If you lose the
key, send the registration card to the
manufacturer (not to the dealer) to get a
replacement key.
*[RE14250(ALL)03/95]
NOTE: If entire lug wrench/lug nut key
assembly is lost, see your nearest Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer who has
access to a master set of keys.
[RE14275(ALL)11/94]
DO NOT USE THE KEY WITH AN IMPACT
WRENCH.
*[RE14100(ALL)03/95]
[RE14300(ALL)04/95]
quarter page art:0010357-B
The anti-theft lug nut and key
[RE14350( T)02/95]
one third page art:0000398-A
The anti-theft lug nut and key (SHO only)
232
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE14400(ALL)03/95]
*[RE14600(ALL)03/95]
Removing the anti-theft lug nut
*[RE14700(ALL)03/95]
Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key
and apply pressure on the key with the wrench.
Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise direction
to remove the lug nut.
*[RE14800(ALL)09/95]
*[RE14900(ALL)03/95]
Reinstalling the anti-theft lug nut
*[RE15050(ALL)03/95]
If the Engine Cranks But Does
Not Start or Does Not Start After
a Collision
*[RE15100(ALL)07/95]
*[RE15200(ALL)07/95]
The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch
*[RE15250(ALL)07/95]
For information on how to check and reset the
fuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off
switch in the Index.
Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Make
sure that you hold the key square to the lug nut.
If you hold the key on an angle, you may
damage the key and the lug nut.
Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place the
lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and, while
applying pressure on the key, install the lug nut.
If the engine cranks but does not start or if you
have had a collision, the fuel pump shut-off
switch may have been triggered. The shut-off
switch is a device that stops the fuel pump
when your vehicle has been involved in a
substantial jolt.
%
Towing Your Vehicle
[RE16500(ALL)10/95]
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact
a professional towing service or, if you are a
member, your roadside assistance center. Your
Taurus should be towed from the front unless
conditions do not allow it. It is recommended
that your vehicle be towed with wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
*[RE16400(ALL)05/95]
233
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE17550(ALL)10/95]
three fourths page art:0001463-A
*[RE17600(ALL)03/95]
When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator
what kind of vehicle you have. A towing
manual is available from Ford Motor Company
for all authorized tow truck operators. Have
your tow truck driver refer to this manual for
the proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
234
File:12fcret.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996
*[RE18000(ALL)03/95]
Towing Your Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle
*[RE18100(ALL)03/95]
At times, you may want to tow your vehicle
behind another vehicle, such as a recreational
vehicle, a car, or a truck.
*[RE18200(ALL)03/95]
*[RE18300(ALL)03/95]
*[RE18400(ALL)03/95]
Before you have your vehicle towed:
[RE18500(ALL)01/95]
*[RE18600(ALL)03/95]
[RE18700(ALL)01/95]
*[RE19000(ALL)08/95]
❑ Release the parking brake.
❑ Move the gearshift to N (Neutral).
❑ Turn the key in the ignition to OFF.
❑ Unlock the steering wheel.
Do not tow your vehicle at a speed faster than
35 mph (56 km/h) or for a distance greater than
50 miles (80 km), unless the drive wheels are
placed on dollies.
RWARNING
Never use a tow bar that attaches to the
bumper when you tow your vehicle. This
could damage the bumper and cause an
accident.
235
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
Customer Assistance
%
*[HS00205(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00210(ALL)11/95]
*[HS00215(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00220(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00225(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00230(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00235(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00240(ALL)06/94]
Roadside Assistance
Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,
seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators
who put you in touch with the help you need if
you experience a problem with your vehicle.
This complimentary service is provided to you
throughout your warranty period of 3 years or
36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first.
To purchase Roadside Assistance coverages
beyond this period (available through Ford Auto
Club in the United States or Ford and
Lincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contact
your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Additional
Roadside Assistance coverage is unavailable in
Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.
Roadside Assistance will cover the following:
❑ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.
❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.
❑ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.
❑ Bring you fuel if you run out.
❑ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even
non-warranty related tows, like accidents or
getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered
(some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing and repossession).
237
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
*[HS00245(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00250(ALL)06/94]
How to use Roadside Assistance
*[HS00255(ALL)04/95]
To receive roadside assistance in the United
States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call
1-800-665-2006).
*[HS00260(ALL)04/95]
Should you need to arrange for roadside
assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain
information about reimbursement call
1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).
*[HS00300(ALL)01/95]
*[HS00400(ALL)01/95]
If You Have a Service Problem
Your Roadside Assistance identification card can
be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your
glove compartment. Complete the card and place
it in your wallet for quick reference.
Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and
Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service
your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how
to get service or maintenance for your vehicle.
%
Service/Maintenance Concerns
(U.S. or Canada)
*[HS00600(ALL)04/95]
Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your
selling dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction. You may, however, take
your vehicle to any authorized Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your
dealer will be able to resolve your concern.
*[HS00700(ALL)04/95]
If you are not satisfied with the service you
received from your dealership’s service
department, talk to the service manager at the
dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to
the owner or general manager of the dealership.
In most cases, you will have your concern
resolved at this level.
*[HS00505(ALL)02/95]
238
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
*[HS01000(ALL)03/95]
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs to be serviced, or if you need more help
than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford
Customer Assistance Center to find an
authorized dealership that may be able to help.
*[HS01100(ALL)02/95]
If you live in the U.S. and have any questions or
concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Center.
*[HS01125(ALL)03/95]
%
one inch art:0060100-E
*[HS01150(ALL)03/95]
If you live in Canada and have any questions or
concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Centre.
*[HS01175(ALL)04/95]
%
one inch art:0060101-C
*[HS01200(ALL)04/95]
Please have the following information available
when contacting the Customer Assistance Centre:
*[HS01300(ALL)04/95]
❑ your telephone number (both business and
*[HS01400(ALL)04/95]
❑ the name of the dealer and the city where the
*[HS01500(ALL)03/95]
*[HS01550(ALL)03/95]
❑ the year and make of your vehicle
❑ the date purchased
home)
dealership is located
239
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
*[HS01600(ALL)03/95]
% [HS01700(ALL)09/95]
*
❑ the current mileage on your vehicle
❑ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
listed on your owner card and/or your
vehicle ownership license
[HS01800(ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0010630-A
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)
*[HS02200(ALL)03/95]
If you still have a service or product complaint,
you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement
Board (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.
%
The Dispute Settlement Board
(U.S. Only)
*[HS02400(ALL)03/95]
The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,
independent dispute-settlement program
available free to owners or lessees of qualifying
Ford Motor Company vehicles.
*[HS02500(ALL)01/95]
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be
available in all states. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures and/or to
discontinue this process at any time without
notice and without incurring obligations.
*[HS02600(ALL)01/95]
What Kind of Cases Does the Board
Review?
*[HS02700(ALL)08/95]
The Board reviews unresolved warranty
performance complaints on Ford, Mercury and
Lincoln cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks
under warranty that have not been resolved by a
dealer or Ford Motor Company.
*[HS02300(ALL)02/95]
240
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
*[HS02750(ALL)03/95]
*[HS02800(ALL)01/95]
*[HS02900(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03100(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03200(ALL)01/95]
The Board does not review issues involving:
*[HS03300(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03400(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03450(ALL)01/95]
❑ Items not covered by your warranty
❑ Alleged liability claims
❑ Property damage where such damage is
*[HS03500(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03600(ALL)01/95]
❑ Cases currently in litigation
❑ Vehicles not used primarily for personal,
*[HS03650(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on
which applicable express written new
vehicle warranties have expired at
receipt of your application are not
eligible. Eligibility may differ
according to state law. For example, see
the unique brochure for California
purchasers/lessees.
*[HS03700(ALL)04/95]
*[HS03800(ALL)04/95]
*[HS03900(ALL)04/95]
*[HS04000(ALL)04/95]
*[HS04200(ALL)04/95]
How Does the Board Work?
❑ A non-Ford product
❑ A non-Ford dealership
❑ A vehicle sales transaction
❑ A request for reimbursement of consequential
expenses unless incidental to a service or
product complaint being reviewed
significant when compared to the economic
loss alleged under the warranty dispute
family, or household purposes
The Board has four members:
❑ three consumer representatives
❑ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer
Consumer candidates for Board membership are
recruited and trained by an independent
consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of
their business leadership qualities.
241
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
*[HS04300(ALL)04/95]
If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and
36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warranty
start date), you have a right to make an oral
presentation before the Board by indicating your
choice on the application. Also, oral
presentations may be requested by the Board. A
decision is made by the Board by simple
majority vote.
*[HS04350(ALL)04/95]
Board members review all the materials related
to each complaint and, based on the available
information, arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Decisions are based on the written
statements and any oral presentations made by
each of the involved parties.
*[HS04400(ALL)04/95]
Because the Board usually meets only once a
month, some cases will take longer than 30 days
to be reviewed. The Board will make every
effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it
receives the customer application form.
*[HS04500(ALL)04/95]
After your case has been reviewed, the Board
will mail you its decision in writing. It will also
provide you with a form to indicate your
acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The
decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer
and Ford, but customers may have other options
available to them under state or federal law.
*[HS04600(ALL)04/95]
The decisions of the Board, however, may be
introduced into evidence by any party in
subsequent legal proceedings that may be
initiated.
242
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
*[HS04700(ALL)01/95]
*[HS04800(ALL)04/95]
How Do You Contact the Board?
Write to the Board at the following address to
request a brochure/application. You will be sent
a brochure and a one-page customer application
form. The form should be completed and mailed
to the same address.
*[HS04900(ALL)02/93]
one inch art:0060102-B
*[HS05100(ALL)04/95]
*[HS05200(ALL)04/95]
What is the Review Process?
*[HS05300(ALL)04/95]
To review your case properly, the Board needs
the following information:
*[HS05400(ALL)04/95]
❑ legible copies of all documents and
*[HS05500(ALL)08/95]
❑ the year, make, model, and vehicle
*[HS05600(ALL)04/95]
*[HS05700(ALL)04/95]
❑ the date you bought your vehicle
❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the time
*[HS05800(ALL)04/95]
❑ the current mileage
Your application will be reviewed and if it is
determined to be eligible, you will receive an
acknowledgment indicating the file number
assigned to your application and the local Board
address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford
Motor Company representative are asked to
submit statements.
maintenance or repair orders that relate to
the case
identification number (VIN)
of repair
243
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
*[HS05900(ALL)04/95]
❑ the name of the dealer who sold you the
*[HS06000(ALL)04/95]
❑ a brief description of your unresolved
*[HS06100(ALL)05/95]
❑ a brief summary of actions that were taken
*[HS06200(ALL)05/95]
❑ the names
*[HS06300(ALL)04/95]
❑ a description of the action you want done to
*[HS06305(ALL)07/95]
Should your application NOT qualify for review,
an explanation will be mailed to you.
vehicle or who serviced your vehicle
complaint
with the dealer and Ford Motor Company
(if known) of all people you
contacted at the dealership
resolve your concern.
%
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Only)
*[HS06340(ALL)01/95]
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor
Company.
*[HS06360(ALL)01/95]
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Ford
Motor Company.
*[HS06380(ALL)01/95]
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or
366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write
to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You
can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
*[HS06320(ALL)04/95]
244
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
%
Ford of Canada Customer
Assistance
*[HS07800(ALL)08/95]
*[HS07850(ALL)03/95]
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
*[HS07700(ALL)05/95]
If you live in Canada and have any questions or
concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Centre.
*[HS07950(ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0060101-C
*[HS07960(ALL)04/95]
Please have the following information available
when contacting the Customer Assistance Centre:
*[HS07980(ALL)04/95]
❑ your telephone number (both business and
*[HS08000(ALL)04/95]
❑ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
*[HS08020(ALL)03/95]
*[HS08040(ALL)03/95]
*[HS08060(ALL)04/95]
❑ the year and make of your vehicle
❑ the date purchased
❑ the name of the dealer and the city where the
*[HS08080(ALL)04/95]
❑ the current mileage on your vehicle.
home)
listed on your owner card and/or your
vehicle ownership license.
dealership is located
245
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
%
Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)
*[HS08200(ALL)09/95]
In those cases where you continue to feel that
the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a
factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an
impartial third party mediation/arbitration
program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
*[HS08300(ALL)09/95]
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and
relative speedy alternative to resolve a
disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without
cost to you and is designed to eliminate the
need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
*[HS08400(ALL)09/95]
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
Arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
enviroment. These impartial Arbitrators review
the positions of the parties, make decisions and,
where appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair and
final as the Arbitrator’s award is binding on
both you and Ford of Cananda.
*[HS08450(ALL)09/95]
CAMVAP services are available in all territories
and provinces, except Quebec. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly
at 1-800-207-0685.
*[HS08500(ALL)10/95]
This plan is not available in the province of
Quebec.
*[HS08100(ALL)09/95]
246
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
%
Getting Help Outside the U.S.
and Canada
*[HS08700(ALL)06/95]
Before you export your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy
or consulate to make sure local regulations do
not prevent you from registering your vehicle.
Officials at the embassy can also help you decide
whether you should import your vehicle to that
country.
*[HS08800(ALL)06/95]
Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you
where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get
unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an
anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle
needs, contact a district or owner relations office
before you leave the U.S. or Canada.
*[HS08900(ALL)06/95]
Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a
proper conversion may damage the effectiveness
of your emissions control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford
Motor Company is not responsible for any
damage that is caused by use of improper fuel.
*[HS09000(ALL)06/95]
You may also have difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.
*[HS09100(ALL)06/95]
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in Central or South America,
the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot
help you, write to:
*[HS08600(ALL)06/95]
*[HS09200(ALL)06/95]
one inch art:0095024-A
247
File:13fchst.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996
*[HS09300(ALL)06/95]
If you are in other foreign countries, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot
help you, they can direct you to the appropriate
Ford affiliate office.
*[HS09400(ALL)06/95]
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,
register your Vehicle Identification Number and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations.
248
File:14fcact.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:03:51 1996
Accessories
*[AC00200(ALL)03/95]
*[AC00225(ALL)04/95]
Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle
Ford has many fine products available from
your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its
finishes. For best results, use the following, or
products of equivalent quality:
[AC00250(ALL)10/95]
twelve pica chart:0001434-B
*[AC00300(ALL)04/95]
A wide selection of accessories is available
through your local authorized dealer. These fine
accessories have been engineered specifically to
fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom
designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built
vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from
high quality materials and meets or exceeds
Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.
That is why Ford brand accessories are
warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles
(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your
dealer for complete warranty information and
accessory availability.
249
File:14fcact.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:03:51 1996
*[AC00350(ALL)06/95]
Safety, Comfort, and Convenience
[AC00400(ALL)07/95]
twenty-eight pica chart:0000569-M
*[AC00600(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers, and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label). Consult your dealer for specific
weight information.
250
File:14fcact.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:03:51 1996
*[AC00700(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) or the Canadian
Radio Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulates the use of mobile
communications systems — such as
two-way radios, telephones, and theft
alarms — that are equipped with radio
transmitters. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with FCC or CRTC regulations and
should be installed only by a qualified
technician.
*[AC00800(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly
designed for automotive use or are not
properly installed. For example, when
operated, such systems may cause the
engine to stumble or stall. In addition,
such systems may themselves be
damaged or their operation affected by
operating your vehicle. (Citizens band
[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,
and other transmitters whose power
output is 5 watts or less will not
ordinarily affect your vehicle’s
operation.)
*[AC00900(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: Because we have no control over the
installation, design, or manufacture of
such systems, Ford cannot assume
responsibility for any adverse effects or
damage that may result if you use this
equipment.
251
File:14fcact.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:03:51 1996
% [AC01000( T)04/95]
thirty-six pica chart:0001392-A
252
File:14fcact.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:03:51 1996
[AC01100( T)04/95]
thirty-six pica chart:0001393-A
253
File:14fcact.ex
Update:Mon Jan 22 16:03:51 1996
[AC01200( T)04/95]
thirty-six pica chart:0001394-A
254
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
Servicing Your Taurus
%
Service Made Easy
*[SV00300(ALL)03/95]
*[SV00400(ALL)01/95]
*[SV00500(ALL)01/95]
Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.
1.
When we can, we design parts that do not
need to be serviced.
*[SV00600(ALL)01/95]
2.
We want to make servicing your vehicle as
easy as possible. To help you:
*[SV00700(ALL)01/95]
❑ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in
*[SV00800(ALL)01/95]
❑ When possible, we design parts — such as
*[SV00900(ALL)05/94]
❑ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that
*[SV01000(ALL)01/95]
This chapter tells you about the basic parts that
you need to check and service regularly.
*[SV01100(ALL)03/95]
If your vehicle needs professional servicing, see
the Customer Assistance chapter.
*[SV01200(ALL)03/95]
Check your Warranty Information Booklet to find
out which parts are covered.
the engine compartment so that you can find
them easily.
the headlamp bulbs — that can be replaced
without tools.
makes tracking routine service for your
vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is
located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet.
255
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV01250(ALL)03/95]
Ford Motor Company recommends that you
perform the Owner Maintenance Checks listed in
the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
These services are important for the proper
operation of your vehicle. In addition to the
conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance
Checklist, be alert for any unusual noise,
vibration, or other indication that your vehicle
may need service. If you do notice something
unusual, see that your vehicle is serviced
promptly.
[SV01275(ALL)03/95]
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,
and service parts conforming to specifications.
Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Using these parts for replacement is your
assurance that Ford-built quality stays in your
vehicle.
*[SV01300(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
%
*[SV01600(ALL)06/95]
Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle
*[SV01700(ALL)06/95]
Be especially careful when inspecting or
servicing your vehicle. Here are some general
precautions for your safety:
[SV01800(ALL)10/95]
❑ Do not work on a hot engine. The engine
%
cooling fans may come on unexpectedly.
Always turn the engine off and let it cool.
256
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV01850(ALL)10/95]
RWARNING
The cooling fans are automatic and may
come on at any time. Always disconnect
the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.
*[SV01900(ALL)06/95]
❑ If you must work with the engine running,
*[SV02000(ALL)06/95]
❑ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed
*[SV02100(ALL)08/95]
❑ Never get under a vehicle while it is
*[SV02200(ALL)06/95]
❑ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking
*[SV02250(ALL)03/95]
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must
“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle
will drive properly. To find out how the engine
does this, see Battery in this chapter.
*[SV02550(ALL)03/95]
*[SV02600(ALL)03/95]
Working with the engine off:
1.
Set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
*[SV02625(ALL)06/95]
2.
Remove the key from the ignition after you
turn the engine off.
*[SV02650(ALL)06/95]
3.
Block the wheels. This will prevent your
vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that
could get caught in moving parts. Take
appropriate precautions with long hair.
space with the engine running, unless you are
sure you have enough ventilation.
supported by a jack only. If you must work
under a vehicle, use safety stands.
materials away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
257
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV02700(ALL)03/95]
*[SV02800(ALL)03/95]
Working with the engine on:
1.
Set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
*[SV02825(ALL)03/95]
2.
Block the wheels. This will prevent your
vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
*[SV03000(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
Do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
*[SV03100(ALL)03/95]
% [SV03200(ALL)01/95]
*
%
Opening the Hood
1.
Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the bottom left corner
of the instrument panel.
%
2.
Go to the front of the vehicle and release the
auxiliary latch that is located under the hood
at the center of the vehicle.
*[SV03400(ALL)01/95]
3.
Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it
open.
*[SV03500(ALL)01/95]
Whenever you close the hood, latch it securely.
*[SV03300(ALL)02/95]
258
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV03550(ALL)11/94]
full page art:0000689-E
The hood release, hood latch, and lift cylinder assembly
259
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV04350(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Read and understand Precautions When
Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning
of this chapter before opening the
hood.
*[SV04500(ALL)04/95]
*[SV04600(ALL)09/93]
Engine Compartment
%
[SV04700(ALL)10/95]
[SV04750(ALL)10/95]
[SV04775( T)08/95]
*[SV04850(ALL)11/94]
Your vehicle has one of these types of engines:
❑ a 3.0L Vulcan engine
❑ a 3.0L Duratec engine
❑ a 3.4L SHO engine
The following pages show diagrams of each
engine type and where to find items that you
should regularly service.
260
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV05000(ALL)02/95]
full page art:0000299-H
The 3.0 liter Vulcan engine
261
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV05025(ALL)02/95]
full page art:0000301-H
The 3.0 liter Duratec engine
262
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV05050( T)02/95]
full page art:0000300-H
The 3.4 liter SHO engine
263
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV05075(ALL)04/95]
*[SV06000(ALL)07/95]
Cleaning the Engine
*[SV06020(ALL)07/95]
❑ Extreme care must be used if a power washer
*[SV06040(ALL)08/95]
❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of the
*[SV06060(ALL)07/95]
❑ The alternator, distributor and air intake must
*[SV06080(ALL)04/95]
❑ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is
%
A clean engine is more efficient because the
engine is able to cool properly. A build up of
grease and dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the
engine warmer than normal.
is used to clean the engine. The high pressure
fluid could penetrate sealed parts and
assemblies causing damage or malfunctions.
engine block or fuel injection pump, do not
spray a hot engine or injection pump with
cold water.
be covered. Covering these components will
help prevent water damage.
running. Water getting into the engine may
cause internal damage.
%
Filling the Fuel Tank
[SV06800(ALL)04/95]
1.
*[SV06100(ALL)03/95]
[SV06825(ALL)04/95]
one inch art:0001470-A
264
Turn the engine off. After opening the fuel
door, remove the cap carefully and slowly
by turning it counterclockwise 1/4 turn until
it stops. Pull to remove the cap. A tether
attaches the cap to the fuel filler pipe.
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV06850(ALL)04/95]
RWARNING
The fuel system may be under pressure. If
the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the cap.
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure
you or others.
*[SV06900(ALL)05/95]
2.
Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel and
put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel
filler pipe.
[SV06950(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: To help reduce early nozzle shutoffs
and fuel spillage, park your vehicle so
that the fuel filler door is not
downhill. Do not tilt or turn the nozzle
upside down when filling. Avoid
excessively fast fuel dispensing rates
(over 10 gallons [38 liters] per minute).
*[SV07150(ALL)08/95]
NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body of
your vehicle, clean it off immediately.
The fuel may dull or soften the paint
if you do not wash it off.
[SV07200(ALL)10/95]
3.
To replace the fuel cap, align the tabs on the
cap with the notches on the filler pipe. Turn
it clockwise until it stops.
*[SV07250(ALL)10/95]
4.
Push the fuel door closed.
[SV07275(ALL)04/95]
If the Service Engine Soon warning light comes
on and stays on when you start the engine, the
fuel cap may not be properly seated. Turn off
the engine, remove the fuel cap and replace it,
being careful to align the cap properly. For more
information, see Warning lights in the Index.
*[SV07290(ALL)07/95]
If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an
authorized Motorcraft or equivalent part.
265
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV07300(ALL)05/95]
%
RWARNING
If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the
pressure in the fuel tank can damage the
fuel system or cause it to work improperly
in a collision.
*[SV07350(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an
aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer
warranty may be void for any damage
to the fuel tank and/or fuel system.
%
Choosing the Right Fuel
[SV07601(ALL)12/95]
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. Using leaded fuel
is prohibited by federal law. Any vehicle
damage may not be covered by your warranty.
*[SV07500(ALL)06/95]
%
Octane Recommendations
[SV08750( T)02/95]
All models except SHO 3.4L
[SV08800(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle is designed to use regular fuel
with an octane rating of 87. In most cases it is
not necessary to use a fuel with an octane rating
higher than 87. At service stations, the octane
rating is displayed in a label on the pumps.
*[SV08725(ALL)05/95]
*[SV08900(ALL)06/95]
one inch art:0060001-C
Typical octane rating label
[SV09000(ALL)12/95]
We do not recommend gasolines labeled
“regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86
or even less in high altitude areas.
266
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV09100(ALL)12/95]
Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes
knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily
under most driving conditions on the
recommended octane rating fuel, see your dealer
or a qualified service technician to prevent any
engine damage.
[SV09455( T)02/95]
SHO 3.4L engine
[SV09460( T)02/95]
The SHO 3.4L engine has been designed to
operate using premium unleaded fuel with an
octane rating of 91 or higher. Regular unleaded
fuel with an octane rating of 87 may be used if
necessary. For optimum performance and
driveability, it is recommended that you use
premium unleaded fuel.
[SV09470( T)12/95]
In some high altitude areas, “premium” fuels are
sold with octane ratings of less than 91. It is
recommended that you use only those
“premium” fuels with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
%
Fuel quality
[SV09601(ALL)12/95]
Ford approves the use of gasolines, including
those reformulated, that contain oxygenates such
as ethanol (10% maximum) and MTBE (15%
maximum). If methanol is used, the gasoline
should contain no more than 5% with
cosolvents.
[SV09701(ALL)12/95]
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or
hesitation problems, try a different brand of fuel.
If the condition persists, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician.
*[SV09800(ALL)06/95]
It should not be necessary to add any
aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you
continue to use a high-quality fuel.
*[SV09490(ALL)08/95]
267
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV10185(ALL)06/95]
%
Safety Information Relating to Automotive
Fuels
*[SV10195(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury
or death if misused or mishandled.
*[SV10200(ALL)08/95]
Gasoline and other automotive fuels are
extremely flammable. Turn your vehicle off and
do not smoke while refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks and other sources of ignition away from
fuels.
[SV10205(ALL)08/95]
Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if
swallowed. Never attempt to siphon any fuel
by mouth.
*[SV10210(ALL)08/95]
If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or
poison control center immediately. Do not delay
calling a physician merely because no adverse
effects are noticed at first; the toxic effects of
fuels may not become apparent for many
hours.
*[SV10213(ALL)08/95]
If gasoline is swallowed, do not induce
vomiting. If a gasoline-methanol blend is
swallowed, induce vomiting under the direction
of a physician or poison control center.
*[SV10215(ALL)08/95]
Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small
amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.
Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors
has caused cancer in laboratory animals.
*[SV10220(ALL)08/95]
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through
the skin. Be careful not to splash fuel on
yourself or your clothing. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, promptly remove contaminated clothing
and wash the skin thoroughly with soap and
water.
268
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV10225(ALL)08/95]
Fuels can cause severe eye irritation and possibly
eye damage. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with large
amounts of water for 15 minutes, and seek
medical attention.
*[SV10230(ALL)08/95]
If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or
other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of
alcoholism, vapor or skin contact with a
gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same
kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic
beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness could result. Consult
a physician promptly if you experience an
adverse reaction.
[SV10250(ALL)05/95]
Fuel line service
[SV10270(ALL)11/94]
Fuel injection systems operate with pressurized
fuel. The fuel lines are under pressure even
when the engine is off. This system should be
serviced by an authorized dealer using only
Ford approved parts. Using other materials may
be hazardous or allow hydrocarbon emissions
above the legal levels set by the Federal
Government.
%
Running Out of Fuel
[SV11500(ALL)05/91]
If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop on
level ground away from traffic. Add at least one
gallon (four liters) of fuel to start your vehicle
again. If your vehicle is not on level ground,
you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters)
of fuel to start it.
*[SV11550(ALL)07/95]
You may need to crank the engine several times
before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from
the tank to the engine.
*[SV11575(ALL)08/95]
If the engine does not start, check the fuel pump
shut-off switch and reset as required. See Fuel
pump shut-off switch in the Index.
*[SV11300(ALL)05/95]
269
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV11580(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
Never pour fuel in the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result in
fire and personal injury.
*[SV13505(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13510(ALL)07/95]
Fuel Economy
*[SV13515(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13521(ALL)06/95]
To calculate fuel economy:
1.
Fill the tank completely and record the
initial odometer reading.
*[SV13526(ALL)06/95]
2.
Every time you buy fuel record the
amount (in gallons or liters) purchased.
%
Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of
your vehicle and can be calculated as Miles Per
Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers
(L/100K).
Keep a record for at least a month. This will
give you a more accurate estimate than
figuring the fuel economy based on only one
or two readings.
[SV13530(ALL)09/95]
*[SV13535(ALL)07/95]
3.
After at least three to five tankfuls, fill the
fuel tank and record the final odometer
reading.
*[SV13537(ALL)10/95]
4.
Use these equations to calculate your fuel
economy:
*[SV13538(ALL)10/95]
❑ English: MPG = (total miles driven)
*[SV13539(ALL)10/95]
❑ Metric: L/100k = (liters used)
v (gallons used)
v (100 kilometers)
270
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
%
Comparisons With Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and Transport
Canada (TC) Fuel Economy Estimates
*[SV13545(ALL)05/95]
EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from
laboratory tests under simulated road conditions
and may not reflect the actual conditions you
experience or your style of driving. The EPA
fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that
you will achieve the fuel economy shown.
*[SV13555(ALL)08/95]
*[SV13561(ALL)05/95]
Improving Fuel Economy
*[SV13564(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13568(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13572(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13576(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13581(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13584(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13589(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13591(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13593(ALL)05/95]
The following decrease fuel economy:
*[SV13596(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13598(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13599(ALL)05/95]
❑ Underinflated tires
❑ Heavy loads
❑ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or
*[SV13540(ALL)08/95]
%
Fuel economy is affected by a number of
variables which can reduce efficiency. You can
improve fuel economy by understanding these
variables and minimizing their effect.
❑ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance
❑ Excessive speed
❑ Rapid acceleration and excessive speed
❑ Driving with your foot on the brake
❑ Sudden stops
❑ Extended engine idling
❑ Using speed control in hilly terrain
❑ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear
window defroster and other accessories
luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.
271
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV13605(ALL)02/95]
*[SV13611(ALL)01/95]
Self-Service Pointers
*[SV13615(ALL)01/95]
The following procedures require only a tire
gauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshield
washer fluid.
*[SV13620(ALL)01/95]
*[SV13625(ALL)01/95]
❑ Check the engine oil at every refueling stop
❑ Clean the windshield, outside mirrors and
*[SV13630(ALL)01/95]
*[SV13633(ALL)02/95]
*[SV13636(ALL)01/95]
%*[SV13638(ALL)02/95]
*[SV13639(ALL)09/95]
❑ Check windshield washer fluid
❑ Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges
❑ Check the tire pressure at least monthly
Engine Oil Recommendations
If you choose to do your own fueling, you
should also perform a few simple maintenance
routines. This extra effort will save you
additional money and contribute to the driving
efficiency of your vehicle.
headlights
We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an
equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M2C153-F and displaying the American
Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on
the front of the container.
*[SV13650(ALL)03/95]
one third page art:0060021-E
The API Certification Mark
272
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV13670(ALL)01/95]
*[SV13680(ALL)01/95]
*[SV13690(ALL)04/95]
% [SV13700(ALL)01/95]
*
Never use:
% [SV13710(ALL)02/95]
Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are
PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the
best engine performance, fuel economy and
engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F
(-25˚C).
❑ “Non-Detergent” oils
❑ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG
❑ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments
or engine treatments
%
Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and
of the preferred viscosity may be used in your
engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be
changed according to the maintenance schedule.
*[SV13775(ALL)01/95]
*[SV13800(ALL)03/95]
Checking and Adding Engine Oil
*[SV13900(ALL)04/95]
*[SV14000(ALL)02/95]
Checking the engine oil level:
1.
Turn the engine off after it has warmed up
and allow a few minutes for the engine oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
*[SV14025(ALL)03/95]
2.
Set the parking brake, making sure the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
*[SV14100(ALL)02/95]
3.
Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine
heat.
*[SV14200(ALL)03/95]
4.
Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in
yellow) and carefully pull it out of the
engine.
*[SV13770(ALL)03/95]
%
%
Since the proper amount of engine oil is
important for safe engine operation, check the oil
using the dipstick each time you put fuel in
your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
parked on level ground.
273
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV14300(ALL)01/95]
5.
Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into
position, making sure it is fully seated.
[SV14400(ALL)02/95]
one inch art:0001397-A
Engine oil dipstick (3.0L Vulcan)
[SV14450( T)02/95]
one inch art:0001398-A
Engine oil dipstick (3.0L Duratec and 3.4L SHO)
*[SV14500(ALL)11/95]
6.
Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the
oil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, add
engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is
beyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damage
or high oil consumption may occur and
some oil must be removed from the engine.
*[SV14600(ALL)01/95]
7.
Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is
fully seated.
*[SV14700(ALL)03/95]
*[SV14800(ALL)01/95]
Adding engine oil
It may be necessary to add some oil between oil
changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED
engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your
vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if
engine damage is caused by the use of improper
engine oil.
Add engine oil through the oil filler cap
highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the
filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the
opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.
Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.
%
*[SV15000(ALL)03/95]
274
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV16300(ALL)06/95]
*[SV16400(ALL)04/95]
%
Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter
Change the engine oil and oil filter per the
following, whichever occurs first.
[SV16500(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0060618-C
*[SV16550(ALL)03/95]
*[SV16600(ALL)09/95]
%
*[SV16700(ALL)07/95]
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record
Booklet for additional information.
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
RWARNING
Continuous contact with USED motor oil
has caused cancer in laboratory mice.
[SV16800(ALL)07/95]
Protect your skin by washing with mild soap
and water.
275
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
%
*[SV17300(ALL)03/95]
% [SV17320(ALL)09/95]
*
*[SV17350(ALL)09/95]
Engine Coolant
Checking the Engine Coolant
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand
Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter.
[SV17400(ALL)10/95]
RWARNING
The cooling fans are automatic and may
come on at any time. Always disconnect
the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.
%
Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine from
overheating in the summer and from freezing in
the winter. Check the level of the coolant at least
once a month. Simply look at the engine coolant
reservoir located in the engine compartment. To
locate the reservoir, see the diagram of your
vehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in this
chapter.
*[SV17650(ALL)05/95]
The coolant additives also protect the entire
cooling system from internal passageway
corrosion and these additives lubricate the water
pump. The coolant should be serviced as noted
in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
*[SV17600(ALL)05/94]
276
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV17700(ALL)12/95]
one third page art:0000305-E
The engine coolant reservoir (3.0L Vulcan shown — 3.0L
Duratec and 3.4L SHO similar)
[SV17750(ALL)04/95]
The coolant level in the reservoir should be
maintained within the cold fill range.
[SV17900(ALL)02/95]
There may be a low coolant warning light in the
instrument cluster which will light when the
coolant level is low.
*[SV18000(ALL)08/95]
*[SV18050(ALL)11/94]
Checking Hoses
*[SV18100(ALL)09/95]
*[SV18200(ALL)09/95]
Adding Engine Coolant
%
Inspect all engine and heater system hoses and
hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and
loose hose clamps as specified in the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet. Repair or replace
with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary.
RWARNING
Do not put engine coolant in the container
for the windshield washer fluid.
*[SV18250(ALL)09/95]
If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or
antifreeze could make it difficult to see through
the windshield.
277
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV18300(ALL)11/94]
RWARNING
Never remove the pressure cap while the
engine is running or hot to avoid personal
injury that can be caused by escaping
steam or engine coolant.
[SV18500(ALL)04/95]
1.
Before you remove the cap, turn the engine
off and let it cool. Even when the engine is
cool, be careful when you remove the cap.
[SV18600(ALL)02/95]
2.
When the engine is cold, wrap a thick cloth
around the cap and turn it slowly
counterclockwise to relieve pressure.
*[SV18700(ALL)09/95]
*[SV18800(ALL)09/95]
3.
Step back while the pressure releases.
4.
When you are sure that all the pressure has
been released, use the cloth to turn and
remove cap.
*[SV18900(ALL)02/95]
5.
Stand away from the reservoir opening. Hot
steam may blow out or hot engine coolant
may even splash out.
*[SV19000(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in serious personal injury from hot
engine coolant or steam blowout and/or
damage to the engine cooling system or
engine.
*[SV19050(ALL)09/95]
To find out how much engine coolant mixture
your vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refill
capacities for fluids in the Index.
[SV19100(ALL)04/95]
Add engine coolant only to the coolant
reservoir. If the coolant level is low, add to the
reservoir a 50/50 mixture of water and the type
of engine coolant that Ford specifies. You may
add water by itself only in an emergency, but
you should replace it with a 50/50 mixture as
soon as possible.
278
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV19104(ALL)04/95]
Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an
optimized formula that will protect all metal and
rubber elastomers used in Ford engines for four
years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is not
necessary and not recommended to use
supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.
These additives may harm your engine cooling
system. Follow the recommended service interval
for changing your engine coolant.
*[SV19106(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: When you change or add engine
coolant, it is important to maintain
your engine coolant concentration
between 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%
(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your local
climate conditions. Below 40% you will
lose freeze protection and above 60%
your engine may overheat on a warm
day.
*[SV19107(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Less than 40% of coolant concentration
may cause engine corrosion and
overheating. Plain water may be used
in an emergency only. Replace it with
the specified coolant as quickly as
possible.
*[SV19108(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The use of an improper coolant may
void your warranty for the engine
cooling system. Use only a premium,
nationally recognized brand name
engine coolant. Do not use alcohol,
methanol antifreeze or engine coolant
mixed with alcohol or methanol
antifreeze. If you do not use the proper
coolant, the aluminum engine on your
vehicle will corrode.
279
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV19110(ALL)09/95]
Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the
Ford Rotunda engine coolant recycling process
and chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycled
engine coolant or an equivalent recycled engine
coolant that is certified by the supplier to meet
Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A.
%
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
*[SV19115(ALL)09/95]
Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid
E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)
or an equivalent engine coolant that meets Ford
Specification ESE-M97B44-A.
[SV19150(ALL)11/94]
Have your dealer check the engine cooling
system for leaks if:
[SV19200(ALL)11/94]
❑ you have to add engine coolant more than
*[SV19112(ALL)09/95]
once a month, or
[SV19250(ALL)11/94]
❑ you have to add more than a quart (liter) at a
time
*[SV19300(ALL)08/95]
*[SV19350(ALL)11/94]
%
Engine Coolant Drain and Flush
Proper procedures for a complete coolant drain
and flush of the cooling system can be found in
the Car Service Manual. Following these
recommended procedures will ensure that the
specified coolant level and a 50/50 or
appropriate mixture of coolant and water is
maintained.
280
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV19400(ALL)08/95]
*[SV19450(ALL)01/95]
Engine Coolant Refill Procedure
[SV19500(ALL)04/95]
❑ With the engine OFF and cool, remove the
When the entire cooling system is drained and
refilled, the following procedure should be used
to ensure a complete fill:
pressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir.
[SV19550(ALL)04/95]
❑ Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and
water to the coolant reservoir. Refer to Refill
Capacities later in this chapter for the correct
amount.
[SV19600(ALL)02/95]
❑ Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolant
is at the top of the cold fill range.
*[SV19700(ALL)05/95]
❑ Reinstall the pressure cap until it clicks.
❑ Start and idle the engine until the radiator
[SV19750(ALL)04/95]
❑ Immediately shut off the engine and let cool.
[SV19650(ALL)04/95]
upper hose is warm (this indicates the
thermostat is open and coolant is flowing
through the entire system).
Cautiously remove the pressure cap and add
a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and
water until the coolant is within the cold fill
range in the coolant reservoir.
[SV19800(ALL)02/95]
❑ Reinstall the pressure cap until a click is
heard and felt.
*[SV19850(ALL)03/95]
*[SV19900(ALL)03/95]
❑ Check for leaks at the draincock.
❑ Recheck the engine coolant level, using the
recommended procedure, after one or two
occasions of vehicle use.
281
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV19950(ALL)04/95]
About Your Battery
*[SV20001(ALL)02/95]
Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery. When the original
equipment battery is replaced under warranty, it
may be replaced by a Motorcraft
Low-Maintenance Battery.
% [SV20850(ALL)04/95]
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically
controlled by a computer, some control
conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. If you ever disconnect the battery or
install a new battery, you must allow the
computer to “relearn” its idle conditions before
your vehicle will drive properly. To begin this
process, put the gearshift in P (Park), set the
parking brake, turn off all the accessories, and
start the vehicle. Bring the engine to normal
operating temperature. Allow the engine to idle
for one minute in N (Neutral) and one minute in
Drive or Overdrive. Perform the previous
procedure with the air conditioning on and off
(conditions permitting). The relearning process
will complete automatically as you drive the
vehicle.
[SV20875(ALL)10/95]
Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until all
drive modes are “relearned.”
*[SV21000(ALL)03/95]
If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the idle is relearned. Your vehicle
will eventually relearn its idle while you drive
it, but it takes much longer than if you use the
previous procedure.
282
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV21100(ALL)03/95]
*[SV21200(ALL)04/95]
%
Help Us Protect Our Environment
Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that
used lead-acid batteries be returned to an
authorized recycling facility for disposal.
*[SV21300(ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0000983-A
Battery recycling symbol
*[SV21700(ALL)03/95]
Windshield Washer Fluid and
Wipers
%
*[SV21800(ALL)03/95]
Washer Fluid
[SV21900(ALL)11/94]
Check the level of the windshield washer fluid
every time you stop for fuel. The reservoir for
washer fluid is located on the passenger’s side of
the engine compartment and is highlighted with
a washer symbol.
%
[SV22205(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000308-B
The windshield washer fluid reservoir
283
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV22400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not put windshield washer fluid in the
container for the engine coolant.
*[SV22500(ALL)01/95]
%
Use specially formulated windshield washer
fluid rather than plain water, because specially
formulated washer fluids contain additives that
dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer
fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such
as methanol should be used in freezing weather
(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or local
regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common
antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection
without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,
wiper blades, and windshield washer system.
[SV22550(ALL)04/95]
RWARNING
Washer solution contains methanol which
is poisonous. Observe all warnings
indicated on label of washer solution.
% [SV22600(ALL)06/94]
Checking the washer fluid for the
liftgate (If equipped)
[SV23100(ALL)04/95]
If your wagon has a rear window wiper, check
the reservoir for its washer fluid regularly. This
is not the same reservoir that your windshield
wipers use. The opening for this reservoir is on
the right side of the liftgate opening, below the
tail lamp. Refill this reservoir with the same
solution you use for your windshield. To find
out how much washer fluid the reservoir holds,
see Refill Capacities later in this chapter.
284
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV23200(ALL)03/95]
*[SV23300(ALL)03/95]
Wiper Blades
*[SV23400(ALL)09/95]
If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both
the windshield and the wiper blades. Use
undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do
not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will
damage your blades.
*[SV23500(ALL)03/95]
To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply
turn the ignition to the ACC position and turn
your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a
vertical position and turn the ignition to the OFF
position. Do not move the wipers manually.
Manually moving the wipers across the
windshield may damage them.
*[SV23600(ALL)03/01]
*[SV23700(ALL)09/95]
Wiper blade replacement
[SV23705(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle uses a 24" wiper on the driver side
and a 20" wiper on the passenger side.
%
Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice
a year. Also check them whenever they seem
less effective than usual. Substances such as tree
sap and some hot wax treatments used by
commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness
of wiper blades.
If the wiper blades still do not work properly
after you clean them, you may need to replace
the wiper blade assembly or the blade element.
When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade
refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part
or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the
instructions that come with them.
285
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV23716(ALL)04/95]
MicronAirH Air Filter
Replacement
*[SV23719(ALL)04/95]
In your climate control system, you may have a
filter that cleans the air before it enters the
interior of the vehicle. This filter should be
replaced at the intervals in the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet.
[SV23723(ALL)04/95]
To replace the MicronAirH air filter:
[SV23725(ALL)04/95]
1.
Open the hood. Move the vacuum hose at
the rear passenger side of the engine
compartment by pulling the hose clips off
the leaf screen and removing the loose clip.
With a coin or screwdriver, turn the four
retainers on the leaf screen 90˚ and pull
them straight out. Remove the leaf screen.
[SV23730(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001387-A
Removing the vacuum hose clips
286
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV23735(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001384-A
Removing the leaf screen
[SV23740(ALL)04/95]
2.
With a wrench or socket, remove the two
screws that hold the water shield. Move the
water shield toward the center of the vehicle
until there is enough clearance to remove it.
[SV23745(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001385-A
Removing the water shield
[SV23750(ALL)04/95]
3.
Remove the old filter by sliding it forward
out of the plastic tray then towards the
center of the vehicle until there is enough
clearance to remove it.
[SV23755(ALL)04/95]
4.
Install the new filter by compressing it and
sliding it into the plastic tray. Push the left
rear corner back and down to seat it in the
tray. Push the other edges of the filter down
to seat the filter completely.
287
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV23760(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001386-A
Installing the new filter
[SV23765(ALL)04/95]
5.
[SV23770(ALL)04/95]
6.
*[SV23800(ALL)03/95]
*[SV23900(ALL)03/95]
Tires
%
Reinstall the water shield, sliding it from the
center of the vehicle toward the fender. As
you position it over the filter, guide the
hinged flap on the left side of the shield
down between the filter and the fender.
Slide the shield toward the fender until the
holes on the shield align with the holes on
the vehicle body. Reinstall the two screws
that hold the shield in place.
Reinstall the leaf screen. Tuck the left rear
corner of the screen under the top of the
fender, then lower the screen into position.
Reinstall the four retainers, turning them 90˚
to lock them into place. Reinstall the vacuum
line hose clips and the one loose clip in the
notches in the leaf screen.
Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel
tank. If one tire looks lower than the others,
check the pressure in all of them. Always follow
these precautions:
*[SV24200(ALL)03/95]
❑ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended
*[SV24300(ALL)02/95]
❑ Stay within the recommended load limits (see
pressures.
Load limits in the Index).
288
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV24500(ALL)02/95]
❑ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly
*[SV24550(ALL)10/89]
*[SV24700(ALL)01/95]
❑ Drive at safe speeds.
*[SV24800(ALL)05/95]
distributed.
If you do not take these precautions, your tires
may fail or go flat.
RWARNING
Driving too fast for conditions creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Driving at very high speeds for extended
periods of time may result in damage to
vehicle components.
% [SV24850(ALL)04/95]
*[SV24900(ALL)05/95]
At least once a month, check the pressure in all
your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an
accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire
pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle
has been parked for at least one hour or has
been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can
find the proper cold pressure and load limits of
recommended size tires on the Tire Pressure
Decal inside the glove compartment.
RWARNING
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, possibly
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
289
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV24925(ALL)04/95]
Consistent high-speed driving
*[SV24930(ALL)07/95]
Ford Motor Company recommends obeying
posted speed limits.
*[SV24950(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Driving too fast for conditions creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Driving at very high speeds for extended
periods of time may result in damage to
vehicle components.
[SV24975(ALL)02/95]
In the event of continuous operation at high
speed, the cold air pressure in all tires must be
increased by 4 p.s.i. (28 kpa) when compared to
the inflation pressure shown on the tire decal
posted in the glove compartment. Under no
circumstances should you exceed maximum tire
inflation pressure which is molded on the tire
outer side wall.
[SV25025(ALL)02/95]
Your vehicle has been equipped with proper
speed rated tires to meet its speed capabilities.
For further details, consult your Tire Warranty
Booklet provided with the vehicle in the glove
compartment.
%
Tire Rotation
[SV25200(ALL)11/94]
Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires
perform different jobs, they often wear
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly
and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
[SV25300(ALL)11/94]
Rotate the tires according to the following
diagram. Do not include the spare tire as part of
your rotation. If you notice that the tires wear
unevenly, have them checked.
*[SV25100(ALL)02/95]
290
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV25410(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0001369-A
Rotating the tires
%
Replacing the Tires
[SV25800(ALL)01/89]
We recommend that you use all-weather tires
when you replace your tires.
[SV25850( T)12/95]
SHO models must use a P225/55VR16 tire for
replacement.
*[SV25900(ALL)05/95]
Replace any tires that show wear bands. When
your tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16
inch (2 mm) of tread left.
*[SV25700(ALL)04/95]
[SV26150(ALL)05/94]
quarter page art:0001318-A
A worn-out tire
*[SV26175(ALL)01/95]
Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,
you may need to replace them before a wear
band appears across the entire tread. Some spots
wear more heavily than others.
291
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV26300(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
When replacing full size tires, never mix
radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use
only the tire sizes that are listed on the
tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires
are the same size, speed rating, and
load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire
combinations recommended on the decal.
If you do not follow these precautions,
your vehicle may not drive properly and
safely.
*[SV26400(ALL)01/95]
Tires that are larger or smaller than your
vehicle’s original tires may also affect the
accuracy of your speedometer.
*[SV27400(ALL)02/95]
*[SV27500(ALL)01/95]
Information About Tire Quality Grades
%
*[SV27550(ALL)01/95]
*[SV27600(ALL)01/95]
New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their
Tire Quality Grade (described below) molded
into the tire’s sidewall. These Tire Quality
Grades are determined by standards that the
United States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic
tires for use on passenger cars. They do not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires
with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined in Title 49
Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford to give you the
following information about tire grades exactly
as the government has written it.
292
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV27799(ALL)01/95]
*[SV27800(ALL)01/95]
Treadwear
*[SV27999(ALL)01/95]
*[SV28000(ALL)01/95]
Traction A B C
*[SV28299(ALL)01/95]
*[SV28300(ALL)01/95]
Temperature A B C
%
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests
and does not include cornering (turning)
traction.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
293
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
*[SV28500(ALL)04/95]
*[SV28600(ALL)01/95]
%
Snow Tires and Chains
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads
that provide traction in rain or snow. However,
during the winter months in some climates, you
may need to use snow tires and occasionally
chains for your tires.
*[SV28700(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Snow tires must be the same size and
grade as the tires you currently have on
your vehicle.
*[SV28775(ALL)02/95]
Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or
if the law requires them where you live. If you
choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be
aware of the following:
*[SV28825(ALL)08/93]
❑ Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminum
[SV28850( T)12/95]
❑ Do not use tire chains if your vehicle is
wheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRE
CHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEEL
WHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheel
covers (if equipped) from steel rims before
using tire chains to avoid scratches or
damage.
equipped with P225/55VR16 tires (SHO only).
*[SV28925(ALL)11/94]
❑ Local regulations may prohibit or restrict the
use of tire chains. Investigate the laws and
regulations in your area before installing
chains.
294
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV28950(ALL)05/95]
❑ Put the chains on the front tires tightly with
*[SV28975(ALL)05/95]
❑ Do not drive faster than 30
*[SV29025(ALL)11/94]
❑ Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drive
*[SV29050(ALL)11/94]
❑ Do not use chains on temporary spare tires.
*[SV29150(ALL)05/94]
❑ Remove tire chains at the first opportunity
*[SV29160(ALL)04/95]
*[SV29170(ALL)05/95]
Cleaning the Wheels
*[SV29180(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if
the brushes are abrasive.
%
the ends held down securely. Retighten the
chains after driving 1/2 mile (1 km). Follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions.
mph (50 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s recommended
speed limit, whichever is lower. Avoid
bumps, holes and sharp turns. If you can
hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage
to your vehicle.
carefully and avoid hard braking.
They may damage the vehicle and the tire.
after using them on snow and ice. Do not use
the chains on dry roads.
Wash the wheels with the same detergent you
use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use
acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,
fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will
damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil
remover to remove grease and tar.
295
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV29220(ALL)04/95]
Air Filter
% [SV29240(ALL)02/95]
To replace the engine air filter, unclip the two
latches, separate the housing and remove the old
filter. Wipe the interior of the housing clean
before inserting the new filter. Lock the two
latches.
[SV29260(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Do not use oil-impregnated air filters.
Filters other than the ones specified in
this Owner Guide can cause engine
damage. Your warranties may not
apply if your vehicle is damaged
because you used the wrong air filter.
See Motorcraft parts in the Index.
*[SV29300(ALL)05/95]
*[SV29310(ALL)03/95]
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
%
Under normal circumstances, you do not need to
check the fluid level of the transaxle, since your
vehicle does not use up transaxle fluid. Refer to
the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for
replacement intervals. However, if the transaxle
is not working properly — for instance, the
transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or you may
notice some sign of fluid leakage — the fluid
level should be checked.
*[SV29340(ALL)02/93]
*[SV29350(ALL)02/95]
Checking the Automatic Transaxle Fluid
*[SV29370(ALL)01/95]
Wipe off the dipstick cap and pull the dipstick
out. Wipe the indicator end clean. Put the
dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure
it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read
the fluid level.
%
With the vehicle on a level surface and the brake
pedal fully applied, start the engine and move
the gearshift selector through all of the gears.
Allow sufficient time for each position to engage.
Securely latch the gearshift selector in the P
(Park) position. Fully set the parking brake and
leave the engine running.
296
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV29380(ALL)04/95]
one inch art:0000717-E
Automatic overdrive transaxle fluid dipstick
[SV29388(ALL)04/95]
NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven until
some fluid has been added if the fluid
level is below the bottom hole on the
dipstick and the outside temperature is
above 50˚F (10˚C). Add only enough
fluid to bring the level above the
bottom hole.
[SV29395(ALL)04/95]
If the vehicle has not been driven and the fluid
level is above the bottom hole on the dipstick,
do not add fluid. Recheck the fluid level after
your vehicle has reached normal operating
temperature.
*[SV29396(ALL)05/95]
Normal operating temperature is reached after
driving approximately 20 miles (30 km). The
fluid level should be within the crosshatched
area on the dipstick.
*[SV29397(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an
extended period at high speeds, driven
in city traffic during hot weather, or
has been pulling a trailer, the vehicle
should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow the fluid to cool
before checking.
297
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV29400(ALL)01/95]
*[SV29410(ALL)01/95]
Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid
[SV29415(ALL)04/93]
Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through
the filler tube to bring the level within the
crosshatched area on the dipstick. If the level is
above the top hole on the dipstick, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified technician.
%
Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct
type will be used. Correct type is shown on the
dipstick.
%
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
*[SV30200(ALL)03/95]
*[SV30300(ALL)04/95]
Brake Fluid
*[SV29425(ALL)09/95]
%
*[SV30400(ALL)06/93]
%
Under normal circumstances, your vehicle
should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,
expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall
as you put more mileage on your vehicle and
the brake lining wears.
You should check the brake fluid at every
scheduled engine oil change, but be sure to
check it at least once a year. You can do this by
looking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoir
on the master cylinder. (See The Engine Types in
this chapter to locate the master cylinder.) The
fluid level should be at or near the MAX mark.
*[SV30450(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Brake fluid is toxic.
298
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV30475(ALL)07/95]
If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with
running water for 15 minutes. Get medical
attention if irritation persists. If taken internally,
drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical
attention immediately.
*[SV30500(ALL)10/95]
If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove
the cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to
the MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT
3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent
DOT 3 fluid meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A.
*[SV30800(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT
3, you will cause permanent damage to
your brakes.
*[SV30900(ALL)01/95]
*[SV31000(ALL)01/95]
*[SV31100(ALL)01/95]
Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.
If you find that the fluid level is excessively low
— below the seam or ridge on the outside of the
plastic reservoir — have the brake system
inspected.
RWARNING
Do not let the reservoir for the master
cylinder run dry. This may cause the
brakes to fail.
299
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV31140(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000672-B
The brake fluid reservoir
%
*[SV31200(ALL)03/95]
*[SV31300(ALL)01/95]
Power Steering Fluid
Check the level of the power steering fluid at
least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).
%
Checking and Adding Power Steering
Fluid
*[SV31500(ALL)02/95]
1.
Start the engine and let it run until the
power steering fluid reaches normal
operating temperature. The power steering
fluid will be at the right temperature when
the engine coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster is near the center of the
NORMAL operating temperature range.
*[SV31600(ALL)01/95]
2.
While the engine idles, turn the steering
wheel back and forth several times. Make
sure that the cap assembly is installed at this
time.
*[SV31700(ALL)05/95]
3.
Turn the engine off.
*[SV31400(ALL)03/95]
300
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV31800(ALL)04/95]
3.0L Vulcan engine:
%
4.
Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which
is highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). The
fluid level should be between the arrows in
the FULL HOT range, which is marked on
the side of the dipstick, opposite the side
marked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if the
level is within the FULL HOT range.
*[SV32100(ALL)07/94]
5.
If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid
in small amounts, continuously checking the
level, until you reach the FULL HOT range.
Do not overfill.
*[SV31900(ALL)03/94]
[SV32150(ALL)02/95]
half page art:0000311-C
Dipstick for power steering fluid (3.0L Vulcan)
*[SV32175(ALL)03/95]
6.
When you are finished, put the dipstick back
in and make sure that it fits snugly.
301
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV32200( T)02/95]
3.0L Duratec and 3.4L SHO:
*[SV32250(ALL)11/94]
4.
Check the fluid level in the power steering
fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be
between the MIN and MAX lines on the side
of the reservoir.
*[SV32300(ALL)11/94]
5.
If the power steering fluid is below the MIN
mark, add fluid in small amounts until the
level is between the MIN and MAX lines on
the side of the reservoir.
[SV32350( T)02/95]
half page art:0001388-A
Reservoir for power steering fluid (3.0L Duratec and 3.4L
SHO)
[SV32400(ALL)04/95]
Use only MerconH ATF power steering fluid.
*[SV32700(ALL)01/95]
If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive
your vehicle for a long period of time before
adding fluid. This can damage the power
steering pump.
302
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV32900( T)02/95]
If you check the power steering fluid when it is
cold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULL
COLD range on the dipstick (3.0L Vulcan) or
MIN on the reservoir (3.0L Duratec or 3.4L
SHO). The reading will only be accurate if the
fluid temperature is approximately 50 to 85˚F (10
to 30˚C).
% [SV32910(ALL)02/95]
Fuses and Relays
[SV32915(ALL)04/95]
Fuses (conventional and high current) and relays
protect your vehicle’s wiring system from
overloading. If electrical parts in your vehicle are
not working, the system may have been
overloaded and blown a fuse. Before you replace
or repair any electrical parts, check the
appropriate circuit protector. High current fuses
should only be repaired or replaced by your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
[SV33400(ALL)02/95]
The following charts tell you which circuit
protector protects each electrical part of your
vehicle. If a fuse blows, all the parts of your
vehicle that use the circuit will not work.
*[SV33410(ALL)05/95]
Once you have determined which fuses to check,
follow the procedures under Checking and
replacing fuses later in this chapter.
*[SV33500(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Always remove the key from the ignition
before working on or replacing fuses.
303
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV33600(ALL)11/94]
The instrument panel fuses and relays
[SV33935(ALL)11/94]
half page art:0001081-B
The instrument panel fuse panel location
304
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV33940(ALL)12/95]
full page art:0001082-E
The instrument panel fuse cover
305
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV33950(ALL)12/95]
thirty-six pica chart:0001084-F
306
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV33960(ALL)12/95]
thirty-four pica chart:0001086-E
307
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV33975(ALL)11/94]
The power distribution box fuses and relays
*[SV33983(ALL)07/95]
Ford recommends that high current fuses be
replaced by a qualified technician.
*[SV33985(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
[SV33986(ALL)11/94]
half page art:0001089-B
The power distribution box location
308
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV33990(ALL)12/95]
full page art:0001090-B
The power distribution box
309
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV33995( T)12/95]
thirty-two pica chart:0001091-E
310
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV35200(ALL)06/95]
*[SV35300(ALL)02/95]
Checking and Replacing Fuses
[SV35400(ALL)11/94]
1.
Lift the handle of the fuse panel or power
distribution box to unlatch the cover.
[SV35600(ALL)11/94]
2.
On the cover, find the fuse you want to
check. The diagram on the cover tells you
where to locate the fuse on the panel.
[SV35900(ALL)11/94]
3.
Check the fuse to see if it is blown. To
remove the fuse, use the pulling tool
attached to the inside cover of the fuse
panel. Look through the clear side of the
fuse to see if the metal wire inside is
separated. If it is, the fuse should be
replaced.
%
If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps:
*[SV36000(ALL)10/95]
quarter page art:0030248-C
Fuse puller tool and fuse
*[SV36100(ALL)11/94]
4.
Replace the fuse with one that has the right
amperage rating. (See the following chart.)
[SV36200(ALL)04/95]
six pica chart:0001443-A
311
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV36250(ALL)04/95]
fourteen pica chart:0001468-A
*[SV36300(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that has
the specified amperage rating. Using a
fuse with a higher amperage rating can
cause severe wire damage and could start
a fire.
[SV36400(ALL)11/94]
5.
Put the cover back on.
*[SV36600(ALL)01/95]
Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to
blow if you do not find what caused the
overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have
your electrical system checked.
*[SV37500(ALL)03/95]
*[SV37600(ALL)01/95]
The Lights
*[SV37700(ALL)01/95]
*[SV37800(ALL)01/95]
*[SV37900(ALL)01/95]
*[SV37950(ALL)02/95]
❑ headlamps
❑ tail lamps
❑ brakelamps
❑ high-mount brakelamp
It is a good idea to check the operation of the
following lights frequently:
312
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV38000(ALL)01/95]
*[SV38100(ALL)01/95]
*[SV38200(ALL)01/95]
*[SV38300(ALL)01/95]
% [SV38400(ALL)01/95]
*
❑ hazard flasher
❑ turn signals
❑ side markers
❑ license plate lamp
The alignment of your headlamps should be
checked if:
*[SV38500(ALL)01/95]
❑ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to
*[SV38600(ALL)01/95]
❑ the headlamps do not seem to give you
*[SV38700(ALL)11/92]
❑ the headlamps are not aligned so that they
*[SV38800(ALL)03/95]
*[SV38900(ALL)01/95]
Replacing the Headlamp Bulb
%
*[SV39000(ALL)05/95]
turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you
do not have the high beams on
enough light to see clearly at night
point slightly down and to the right.
The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable
bulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replace
the bulb, rather than the whole lamp.
RWARNING
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully
and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp
the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the
next time the headlamps are operated.
*[SV39100(ALL)01/95]
Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you
can immediately replace it with a new one. If a
bulb is removed for an extended period of time,
contaminants may enter the headlamp housing
and affect its performance.
313
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV39250(ALL)11/92]
one third page art:0000345-A
Parts of a headlamp
*[SV39300(ALL)03/95]
*[SV39350(ALL)05/95]
[SV39401(ALL)04/95]
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure that the headlamp knob is in the
OFF position.
2. Lift the hood. If you are replacing the
driver’s side headlamp, unclip the electronic
module on the right side of the battery and
move it out of the way. Find the bulb in the
headlamp socket.
[SV39425(ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0001437-A
The module behind the driver’s side headlamp
*[SV39450(ALL)02/95]
3.
314
Remove the electrical connector from the
bulb by pulling the connector.
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV39501(ALL)02/95]
4.
Remove the bulb retaining ring by rotating it
counterclockwise (when viewed from the
rear) about an eighth of a turn to free it
from the bulb socket, and by sliding the ring
off the plastic base. Keep the ring. It is to be
used again to retain the new bulb.
[SV39550(ALL)02/95]
5.
Carefully remove the bulb from its socket by
gently pulling it straight back out of the
socket. Do not turn the bulb while you
remove it.
*[SV39601(ALL)03/95]
*[SV39650(ALL)02/95]
To install a bulb:
1.
With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base
facing upward, insert the glass end of the
bulb into the socket. You may need to turn
the bulb left or right to line up the grooves
in the plastic base with the tabs in the
socket. When the grooves are aligned, push
the bulb into the socket until the plastic base
contacts the rear of the socket.
*[SV39701(ALL)08/95]
2.
Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plastic
base until it contacts the rear of the socket.
Lock the ring into the socket by rotating it
clockwise until you feel a “stop.”
*[SV39750(ALL)02/95]
3.
Push the electrical connector into the rear of
the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into
position.
*[SV39800(ALL)02/95]
4.
Turn the headlamps on and make sure that
they work properly. If the headlamp was
correctly aligned before you changed the
bulb, you should not need to align it again.
315
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
%
Aiming Headlamps
[SV39901(ALL)02/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle
Headlamp Aim Device (VHAD) on the
headlamp reflector extension and headlamp
housing. Each headlamp may be properly aimed
in the horizontal direction (left/right) and the
vertical direction (up/down) by performing the
steps outlined in the following paragraphs. The
horizontal aim must be adjusted first.
[SV39950(ALL)06/95]
Tools required: One 4mm box wrench or open
end wrench.
[SV40050(ALL)04/95]
Position the vehicle on a surface that is level on
the front-to-rear direction.
[SV40075(ALL)04/95]
If the vehicle cannot be placed on a true level
surface, the headlamps still can be adjusted
using the VHAD if the slope of the surface is
accurately known and does not differ by more
than 1.2˚ from true level. A difference of 2.27
inches in height of the surface between the front
and rear wheels corresponds to 1.2˚ slope.
[SV40100(ALL)04/95]
If the vertical adjuster is within +/s 4
graduations about zero, the vertical headlamp
aim is within specification; and if the horizontal
adjuster is within +/s 2 graduations about zero,
the horizontal headlamp aim is within
specification.
*[SV39850(ALL)02/95]
316
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV40125(ALL)04/95]
half page art:0001425-A
*[SV40201(ALL)06/95]
Horizontal aim adjustment
[SV40250(ALL)04/95]
1.
Open the hood and locate the horizontal
indicator and adjusting screw.
[SV40375(ALL)04/95]
2.
Use a 4mm wrench to turn the horizontal
adjusting screw until the reference mark on
the reflector extension aligns with the “0”
reference mark on the horizontal indicator
when viewed from directly above. If the
vehicle has been in an accident requiring the
front end of the vehicle to be repaired, the
horizontal indicator should be recalibrated
by a servicing facility using the Taurus/Sable
Service Manual instructions.
317
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV40501(ALL)06/95]
Vertical aim adjustment
[SV40601(ALL)04/95]
1.
With the hood open, locate the bubble level
vertical aim indicator. It is visible when
viewed from above and to the rear of the
headlamp.
[SV40650(ALL)04/95]
2.
With the vehicle on a level surface, use a
4mm wrench to turn the vertical aim
adjustment screw (outboard screw) located
on the back of the lamp assembly clockwise
or counterclockwise until the bubble in the
spirit level is centered when viewed from
directly above the bubble.
[SV40725(ALL)04/95]
3.
Close the hood.
[SV40750(ALL)06/95]
If the vehicle is on a downward or upward
slope of not more than 1.2˚, the VHAD’s bubble
level can be used to correct for the effects of the
surface slope, provided that the slope is
accurately known.
[SV40775(ALL)06/95]
Each graduation of the bubble level represents
0.19˚ of downward or upward slope. To correct
for the effects of a surface slope, turn the
vertical aim adjustment screw until the bubble is
centered at a position corresponding to the slope
of the surface.
[SV40800(ALL)02/95]
Each 0.1 inch difference in surface height
between the front and the rear wheels
corresponds to 0.053˚ of surface slope; each 0.19˚
of surface slope corresponds to 0.36 inches
difference in surface height between the front
and rear wheels.
318
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV40820(ALL)02/95]
Replacing the High-Mount Brakelamp Bulb
[SV40830(ALL)04/95]
If you have the sedan, your vehicle has a
brakelamp mounted in the rear window, called a
high-mount brakelamp. The wagon has a
high-mount brakelamp on the outside. You may
need to remove this lamp to replace the
brakelamp bulb.
[SV40832(ALL)11/94]
one third page art:0000623-D
Parts of the high-mount brakelamp (sedan)
[SV40835(ALL)11/94]
Sedan
*[SV40840(ALL)03/95]
To remove the brakelamp:
[SV40842(ALL)11/94]
1.
Remove the package tray trim.
[SV40844(ALL)11/94]
2.
Push the attachment toward the rear
window.
[SV40846(ALL)11/94]
3.
Slide the brakelamp up and away from the
rear window to remove it from the tabs that
hold it down.
[SV40849(ALL)11/94]
4.
Disconnect the bulbs.
319
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV40850(ALL)11/94]
To install the brakelamp:
[SV40855(ALL)11/94]
1.
Install the bulbs.
[SV40860(ALL)11/94]
2.
Position the brakelamp over the tab slots
and line up the tabs with the tab slots.
[SV40865(ALL)11/94]
3.
Push down and toward the rear window to
engage the tabs.
[SV40870(ALL)11/94]
4.
Push attachment toward the rear window
and line up the slot in the attachment with
the edge of the sheet metal hole.
[SV40875(ALL)11/94]
5.
Release the attachment slot onto the sheet
metal hole.
[SV40878(ALL)02/95]
6.
Replace the package tray trim.
[SV40880(ALL)11/94]
Wagon
[SV40885(ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0001396-A
Parts of the high-mount brakelamp (wagon)
320
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV40890(ALL)03/95]
To remove the brakelamp:
[SV40895(ALL)11/94]
1.
Remove the interior trim panel.
[SV40905(ALL)11/94]
2.
Remove the four attachment nuts that hold
the brakelamp in place.
[SV40910(ALL)11/94]
3.
Lift the whole assembly off of the vehicle
from the outside.
[SV40915(ALL)11/94]
4.
Disconnect the bulbs.
[SV40920(ALL)11/94]
To install the brakelamp:
[SV40925(ALL)11/94]
1.
Install the bulbs.
[SV40930(ALL)11/94]
2.
Position the brakelamp into the tailgate
holes.
[SV40935(ALL)11/94]
3.
From the inside of the vehicle, install and
tighten the four nuts that hold the
brakelamp in place.
[SV40940(ALL)11/94]
4.
Install the interior trim panel.
321
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
% [SV40950(ALL)11/94]
Using the right bulbs
% [SV40960( T)04/95]
thirty pica chart:0000327-K
322
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
%
Emission Control System
[SV41100(ALL)12/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with catalytic
converters which enable your vehicle to comply
with applicable exhaust emission requirements.
*[SV41000(ALL)03/95]
*[SV41200(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes into
the passenger compartment. Under
extreme conditions excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the fuel
system, the interior floor covering, or
other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
*[SV41300(ALL)05/95]
To make sure that the catalytic converter and the
other emission control parts continue to work
properly:
*[SV41400(ALL)01/95]
*[SV41500(ALL)01/95]
*[SV41600(ALL)01/95]
❑ Use only unleaded fuel.
❑ Avoid running out of fuel.
❑ Do not turn off the ignition while your
*[SV41700(ALL)03/95]
❑ Have the services listed in your Maintenance
*[SV41710(ALL)03/95]
The Scheduled Maintenance Services listed in the
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet are
required because they are considered essential to
the life and performance of your vehicle and to
its emissions system.
*[SV41720(ALL)05/95]
Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine
Ford replacement parts. If other than Ford or
Motorcraft parts or Ford authorized
remanufactured parts are used for maintenance
replacements or for the service of components
affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts
vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.
Schedule and Record booklet performed
according to the specified schedule.
323
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor
Company parts in performance and durability. It
is the owner’s responsibility to determine the
equivalency of such parts. Please consult your
warranty booklet for complete warranty
information.
*[SV41800(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The
emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which
can start a fire.
[SV41900(ALL)04/95]
Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss
of oil pressure, the charging system warning
light, the service engine soon light, or the
temperature warning light. These sometimes
indicate that the emissions system is not
working properly.
*[SV42000(ALL)01/95]
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your
vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more
unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can
increase the temperature of the engine or
exhaust system.
*[SV42100(ALL)01/95]
By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,
services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or
supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to
intentionally remove an emission control device
or prevent it from working. In some of the
United States and in Canada, vehicle owners
may be liable if their emission control device is
removed or is prevented from working.
*[SV42200(ALL)02/92]
Never use a metal exhaust collector when you
service your vehicle. If the metal collector
contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or
bumper parts they could melt or deform.
324
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV42300(ALL)01/95]
Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate
properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on
for more than five seconds after you shut it off
or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.
*[SV42400(ALL)05/95]
Information about your vehicle’s emission
control system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement
and gives some tune-up specifications.
%
*[SV42405(ALL)07/95]
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
Testing
*[SV42410(ALL)07/95]
In some localities it may become a legal
requirement to pass an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the
vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has
just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to
a not ready for I/M testing condition. To
prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a
“need for additional mixed city and highway
driving to complete the check” of the OBD II
system. As soon as all of the OBD II system
checks are successfully completed, the OBD II
system is set to the ready condition. The amount
of driving required to reach the ready condition
varies with individual driving patterns. To
complete this requirement in the minimum
amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle
defined below. If the vehicle owner cannot or
does not want to do the additional driving
required by law, a service center can perform
this drive cycle as it would any other type of
repair work.
%
325
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV42420(ALL)09/95]
*[SV42430(ALL)06/95]
OBD II Drive Cycle
*[SV42440(ALL)06/95]
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according
to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
*[SV42445(ALL)07/95]
The engine must be warmed up and at
operating temperature before proceeding with
the drive modes of the following OBD II Drive
Cycle.
*[SV42450(ALL)06/95]
1.
Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral)
the vehicle for 4 minutes.
*[SV42460(ALL)06/95]
*[SV42465(ALL)07/95]
2.
Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.
3.
Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (70 km/h)
at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.
*[SV42471(ALL)07/95]
4.
Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at
45 mph (70 km/h) for 30 seconds.
*[SV42475(ALL)06/95]
*[SV42481(ALL)07/95]
5.
Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.
6.
Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at
speeds between 25 and 40 mph
(40-60 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15
minute drive cycle the following modes must
be achieved:
The following steps must be run in the order
shown. If any steps are interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is
acceptable between steps.
*[SV42485(ALL)07/95]
a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10
seconds each
*[SV42491(ALL)07/95]
b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2
throttle position, and
*[SV42495(ALL)07/95]
c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5
minute steady state throttle drives.
326
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV42500(ALL)07/95]
7.
Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and
60 mph (70-100 km/h). This should take
approximately 5 minutes.
*[SV42505(ALL)07/95]
8.
Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at
the selected speed between 45 and 60 mph
(70-100 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.
*[SV42510(ALL)07/95]
9.
Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying
speeds between 45 and 60 mph
(70-100 km/h).
*[SV42515(ALL)07/95]
10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in Drive
for 40 seconds.
*[SV42601(ALL)07/95]
11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.
Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.
327
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV42650(ALL)07/95]
*[SV42700(ALL)07/95]
%
Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,
and Lubricant Specifications
Refill Capacities
[SV42720( T)10/95]
twenty-six pica chart:0000329-P
328
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV42800(ALL)10/95]
%
Motorcraft Parts
[SV42920( T)10/95]
twenty pica chart:0000331-M
329
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV42980(ALL)05/95]
%
Lubricant Specifications
[SV43000(ALL)10/95]
twenty-two pica chart:0000720-S
330
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
%
*[SV44000(ALL)01/95]
*[SV44100(ALL)01/95]
*[SV44150(ALL)01/95]
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance Tips
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an
extended period of time (60 days or more), refer
to the following maintenance recommendations
to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
*[SV44200(ALL)01/95]
*[SV44300(ALL)01/95]
*[SV44400(ALL)01/95]
*[SV44500(ALL)01/95]
General
*[SV44600(ALL)01/95]
*[SV44700(ALL)01/95]
Body
*[SV44800(ALL)01/95]
❑ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed
*[SV44900(ALL)01/95]
❑ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent
*[SV45000(ALL)01/95]
❑ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a
[SV45100(ALL)04/95]
❑ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk latches
❑ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
❑ Protect from sunlight, if possible.
❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they require
regular maintenance to protect against rust
and damage.
❑ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,
grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,
rear wheel housing and underside of front
fenders.
locations.
rust.
thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the
vehicle is washed.
with a light grade oil.
331
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
[SV45150(ALL)04/95]
❑ Lubricate trunk lid or wagon liftgate hinges
with a light grade oil. (Do not lubricate hood
and door hinges.)
*[SV45200(ALL)01/95]
*[SV45300(ALL)01/95]
❑ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.
❑ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
*[SV45350(ALL)01/95]
*[SV45400(ALL)01/95]
Engine
*[SV45500(ALL)01/95]
❑ With your foot on the brake, shift through all
*[SV45600(ALL)01/95]
% [SV45700(ALL)07/94]
*
Fuel system
*[SV45900(ALL)03/95]
NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle
storage (60 days or more), fuel may
deteriorate due to oxidation. This can
damage rubber and other polymers in
the fuel system and may also clog
small orifices.
*[SV46000(ALL)01/95]
Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever
actual or expected storage periods exceed 60
days. Follow the instructions on the label. The
vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to
circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.
*[SV46100(ALL)01/95]
A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel
system will protect the fuel system’s inner
surfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructions
packaged with the product.
%
%
solvents.
❑ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle
until it reaches normal operating temperature.
the gears while the engine is running.
❑ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
332
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV46200(ALL)01/95]
*[SV46300(ALL)01/95]
% [SV46400(ALL)01/95]
*
*[SV46500(ALL)01/95]
*[SV46600(ALL)01/95]
%
*[SV46650(ALL)02/95]
%
Cooling system
❑ Protect against freezing temperatures.
Battery
❑ Check and recharge as necessary.
❑ Keep connections clean and covered with a
light coat of grease.
❑ If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, disconnect the
battery cables to ensure battery charge is
maintained for quick starting. NOTE: If
battery cables are disconnected, it will be
necessary to reset any memory features (eg.
radio presets).
*[SV46700(ALL)01/95]
*[SV46800(ALL)01/95]
Brakes
*[SV46900(ALL)01/95]
*[SV47000(ALL)05/95]
*[SV47100(ALL)01/95]
*[SV47200(ALL)01/95]
Tires
*[SV47300(ALL)05/95]
❑ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (10 m) every 15
%
%
❑ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully
released.
❑ Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
❑ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
clevis pins under vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
days to lubricate working parts to prevent
corrosion.
333
File:15fcsvt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996
*[SV99900( T)07/95]
thirty-six pica chart:FORDADPLN
334
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
[QI00750(ALL)04/95]
full page art:0001469-A
Warning label locations
341
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI01000( T)02/95]
full page art:0001056-D
Front Exterior View — Sedan/Wagon Typical
342
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
[QI01100( T)02/95]
full page art:0001057-D
Front Exterior View SHO
343
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI01300( T)03/95]
full page art:0001060-D
Rear Exterior View Sedan
344
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI01500( T)03/95]
full page art:0001059-D
Rear Exterior View Wagon
345
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI01800( T)03/95]
full page art:0001061-C
346
Entrance View (Console Shift Shown — Column Shift
Similar)
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI02200( T)03/95]
full page art:0001063-D
Driver’s Door
347
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI02400( T)03/95]
full page art:0001087-D
348
Instrument Panel (Column Shift Shown — Console Shift
Similar)
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
[QI02600( T)03/95]
full page art:0001064-D
Instrument Cluster
349
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
[QI02800( T)02/95]
full page art:0001073-C
Instrument Cluster SHO
350
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI02900( T)03/95]
full page art:0001066-C
Trunk
351
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI03100( T)04/95]
full page art:0001067-D
Wagon Cargo Area
352
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI03300( T)03/95]
full page art:0001069-D
3.0L Vulcan Engine Compartment
353
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
% [QI03500( T)03/95]
full page art:0001439-A
3.0L Duratec Engine Compartment
354
File:16fcqit.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996
[QI03700( T)10/95]
full page art:0001068-C
3.4L SHO Engine Compartment
355
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Index
A
ABS warning light
(see Anti-lock brake system) . . .
Accessory position on the ignition .
Additives, engine oil . . . . . . .
Air bag supplemental
restraint system. . . . . . . . .
and child safety seats . . . . . .
description . . . . . . . . . . .
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . .
driver air bag . . . . . . . . .
indicator light . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . .
passenger air bag . . . . . . . .
proper seating . . . . . . . . .
service and information labels . .
tone generator . . . . . . . . .
wearing safety belts . . . . . . .
Air cleaner filter
location . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacing. . . . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning
electronic automatic temperature
control system . . . . . . . .
manual heating and air
conditioning system . . . . .
Alarm, activating remote personal .
Antenna, radio
(see Electronic sound system) . .
Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . .
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
description . . . . . . . . . . .
see also Brake . . . . . . . . .
warning light. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 81
. . . . 59
. . .
273
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
26,
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
23
33
23
31
23
77
27
23
24
27
30
24
260
296
329
95
. . . . 93
. . .
135
. . .
. . .
176
276
. . .
203
. . .
202
. . . . 81
Index 357
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Anti-theft lug nuts and key. . . . . .
Anti-theft system
arming the system . . . . . . . .
triggering . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appeals (see Dispute settlement board)
Assistance (see Customer assistance). .
Audio system
(see Electronic sound system) . . .
Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . .
Automatic transaxle
driving with . . . . . . . . . . .
fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . .
fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . .
fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . .
fluid, specification . . . . . . . . .
Axle
lubricant specifications. . . . . . .
refill capacities . . . . . . . . . .
. .
232
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
138
138
240
237
. .
. .
169
108
.
.
.
.
191,
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
195
298
296
328
330
330
328
B
Backing up . . . . . . . . . .
Basic vehicle warranty . . . . .
Battery
acid, treating emergencies . .
battery saver . . . . . . . .
charging system warning light
disconnecting . . . . . . . .
jumping a disabled battery . .
proper disposal, recycling . .
replacement, specifications . .
servicing . . . . . . . . . .
when storing your vehicle . .
Brake fluid
brake warning light . . . . .
checking and adding . . . .
description . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . .
358 Index
. . . 193, 198
. . . . . . 4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 217
. 113
. . 74
. 282
. 217
. 283
. 329
. 282
. 333
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 73
. 298
. 298
. 330
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Brakelamp
high-mount brakelamp . . .
lamp out warning light . . .
Brakes
adjustment . . . . . . . . .
anti-lock . . . . . . . . . .
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light . . . . . .
applying the brakes . . . . .
brake warning light . . . . .
fluid, checking and adding .
fluid, refill capacities . . . .
fluid, specifications . . . . .
front disc . . . . . . . . .
master cylinder . . . . . . .
new brake linings. . . . . .
noise . . . . . . . . . . .
parking . . . . . . . . . .
servicing . . . . . . . . . .
trailer . . . . . . . . . . .
when storing your vehicle . .
Brake-shift interlock . . . . . .
Break-in period . . . . . . . .
Brights (high beams) . . . . .
Built-in child seat . . . . . . .
Built-in child seat, cleaning. . .
Bulbs, replacing
headlamps . . . . . . . . .
high-mount brakelamp . . .
specifications . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
319
. . . . . . 87
. . . . .
. . . . .
202
203
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
81
202
73
298
298
330
202
298
5
203
205
298
215
333
196
5
115
46
57
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
192,
. .
76,
. .
. .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
313
319
322
Index 359
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
C
Canada, customer assistance . . . . . .
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . .
Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . .
Cargo cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Car seats for children
(see Child safety seats) . . . . . . .
Cassette tape player (see Electronic
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter. . . . . . . . . . .
CD player (see Electronic sound system).
Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging system warning light . . . . .
Childproof locks. . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . .
child safety belts . . . . . . . . . .
child safety seats . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety seats
and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . .
attaching with tether straps . . . . .
automatic locking mode (retractor) . .
built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . .
tether anchorage hardware . . . . . .
Chime
headlamps on. . . . . . . . . . . .
key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . .
safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning your vehicle
built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . .
CD player and discs. . . . . . . . .
chrome and aluminum parts . . . . .
engine compartment. . . . . . . . .
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360 Index
.
245
. 246
. 328
. . 68
. 162
. 161
. . 33
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
177
323
182
294
222
74
125
31
57
33
26,
. .
14,
. .
. .
. .
. .
33
43
33
46
35
35
44
. . 77
. . 60
. . 73
. . 57
. 187
. . 7
. 264
. . 6
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Cleaning your vehicle (continued)
exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . .
fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . .
instrument panel . . . . . . . . .
interior . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interior lamps . . . . . . . . . .
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . .
polishing. . . . . . . . . . . . .
rear windows . . . . . . . . . .
rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . .
safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . .
tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .
upholstery and interior trim . . . .
washing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate control system
electronic automatic
temperature control. . . . . . .
manual heating and air conditioning
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . .
Combination lap and shoulder belts .
Compact disc player (see Electronic
sound system) . . . . . . . . . .
Console, description . . . . . . . . .
Controls
instrument panel . . . . . . . . .
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
steering column . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
108
151
108
91
151
113
154
7
6
105
7
23
108
151
6
6
295
105
.
.
95
93
113
. 62
. 12
182
156
. . . 91
. .
153
. .
115
Index 361
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Coolant (see Engine coolant)
checking and adding . .
drain and flush . . . . .
preparing for storage . .
refill capacities . . . . .
specifications . . . . . .
temperature gauge . . .
Cooling fan . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . .
Cupholder(s) . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance Center,
Customer Assistance Centre,
Ford of Canada . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Ford (U.S.) .
. 276
. 280
. 333
. 328
. 330
. . 82
. 256
. 120
. 156
. 239
. . . . .
239, 245
Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . . .
Daytime running light system . . . .
Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . .
Defrost
rear window and side view mirrors.
windshield . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dipstick
automatic transaxle fluid. . . . . .
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .
power steering fluid . . . . . . . .
Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . .
Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . .
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
childproof locks . . . . . . . . . .
door ajar warning light . . . . . .
lubricant specifications. . . . . . .
Driving under special conditions
bad weather . . . . . . . . . . .
heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . .
high speed . . . . . . . . . . . .
high water . . . . . . . . . . . .
slippery roads . . . . . . . . . .
tips for safe driving . . . . . . . .
towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 91
. . 107
. . 244
D
362 Index
. . 104
95, 103
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 296
. 273
. 300
. 233
. 240
. 125
. 125
. . 77
. 330
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
206
208
290
208
206
206
211
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
E
Electrical system
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operating when the engine is off .
relays . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic sound system
radio reception . . . . . . . . .
tuning the radio . . . . . . . .
warranty and service information
Electronic stereo cassette radio
(see Electronic sound system) . .
Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic
system) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergencies, roadside
assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
battery acid spills . . . . . . . .
fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
jump-starting . . . . . . . . . .
towing. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency brake (parking brake) . .
Emission control system
catalytic converter . . . . . . .
emissions warranty . . . . . . .
Engine
does not start . . . . . . . . .
fuel pump shut-off switch . . . .
preparing to start . . . . . . . .
refill capacities . . . . . . . . .
service points . . . . . . . . .
starting . . . . . . . . . . . .
starting after a collision . . . . .
storing your vehicle. . . . . . .
Engine block heater . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant
checking and adding . . . . . .
checking hoses . . . . . . . . .
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . .
drain and flush . . . . . . . . .
preparing for storage . . . . . .
. . .
303
. . . . 59
. . .
303
. . .
. . .
. . .
177
173
190
. . .
172
sound
. . .
172
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
237
217
268
217
233
205
. . .
323
. . 4, 323
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
63, 65
. 65
. 61
328
260
. 62
. 65
332
. 64
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
276
277
280
280
333
Index 363
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Engine coolant (continued)
proper solution . . . . . . . . .
recovery reservoir . . . . . . . .
refill capacities . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . .
temperature gauge . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge .
Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil
changing oil and oil filter . . . .
checking and adding . . . . . .
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . .
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . .
engine oil pressure warning light .
filter, specifications . . . . . . .
refill capacities . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . .
synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . .
“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . .
viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entry system, keyless . . . . . . .
Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 278
. 277
. 328
. 330
. . 82
. . 82
. 256
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
275
273
274
275
75
329
328
330
273
5
273
128
68
4
F
Fan, engine fan, avoiding injury
Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . .
Flashing the lights . . . . . . .
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid refill capacities . . . . . .
364 Index
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
256
118
116
222
152
328
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Ford Customer Assistance Center . .
Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . .
Ford Extended Service Plan . . . .
Ford Motor Company of Canada . .
Ford of Canada Customer
Assistance Centre . . . . . . . .
Foreign registration . . . . . . . .
French owner guides, how to obtain
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
calculating fuel economy . . . .
capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
choosing the right fuel . . . . .
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates . . . . . .
filling your vehicle with fuel. . .
filter, specifications . . . . . . .
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
improving fuel economy . . . .
octane rating . . . . . . . . . .
quality. . . . . . . . . . . . .
running out of fuel . . . . . . .
safety information relating to
automotive fuels . . . . . . .
storing your vehicle. . . . . . .
treating emergencies . . . . . .
Fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removing . . . . . . . . . . .
replacing. . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut-off switch
engine does not start . . . . . .
starting after a collision . . . . .
Fuse panels
instrument panel . . . . . . . .
power distribution box . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
239
.
240
. .
4
.
245
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
245
.
247
. .
3
.
264
.
270
.
328
.
266
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
271
.
264
.
329
. . 82
.
271
.
266
.
267
.
269
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
268
332
268
264
264
265
329
82
. . . .
. . . .
65
65
. . .
. . .
304
308
Index 365
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Fuses
checking and replacing . . . . . . . .
311
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . .
Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . .
Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . .
Gauges, Mechanical
engine coolant temperature gauge .
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
speedometer . . . . . . . . . . .
tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . .
trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . .
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
calculating . . . . . . . . . . . .
definition. . . . . . . . . . . . .
driving with a heavy load . . . . .
location . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gearshift
automatic operation . . . . . . . .
column-mounted . . . . . . . . .
console-mounted . . . . . . . . .
locking the gearshift. . . . . . . .
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
shifting the gears . . . . . . . . .
shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
calculating . . . . . . . . . . . .
definition. . . . . . . . . . . . .
driving with a heavy load . . . . .
location . . . . . . . . . . . . .
366 Index
. .
. .
. .
264
270
264
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
209
208
208
208
192,
. .
. .
. . .
192,
192,
192,
195
197
198
59
195
195
196
.
.
.
.
209
208
208
208
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
82
82
84
84
84
84
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
H
Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .
autolamp system . . . . . . . .
bulb specification . . . . . . . .
checking alignment . . . . . . .
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . .
daytime running lights . . . . .
flashing . . . . . . . . . . . .
high beam . . . . . . . . . . .
replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . .
turning on and off . . . . . . .
warning chime . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . .
Heated mirrors . . . . . . . . . .
Heating
electronic automatic temperature
control system . . . . . . . .
manual heating and air
conditioning system . . . . .
High beams . . . . . . . . . . .
indicator light . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . .
High-mount brakelamp,
replacing the bulb . . . . . . .
Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood
latch location . . . . . . . . . .
lubrication specifications. . . . .
release lever . . . . . . . . . .
working under the hood . . . .
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
316
.
108
.
322
.
313
.
108
.
107
.
116
.
115
.
313
.
106
. . 77
.
145
.
104
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
118
95
. . 93
.
115
. . 76
.
115
. . .
. . .
319
214
.
.
.
.
.
.
259
330
258
256
119
277
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Index 367
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
I
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN)
Idle, relearning . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition
chime . . . . . . . . . . . . .
positions of the ignition . . . . .
removing the key . . . . . . . .
Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . .
Instrument Cluster. . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel
lighting up panel and interior . .
location of components . . . . .
Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 240
. 221, 282
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
71,
60
59
60
33
84
. . . 110
. . . . 92
. . . 117
J
Jack
positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting your vehicle
attaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . .
disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . .
225
219
221
K
Keyless entry system
locking and unlocking doors
programming entry code. .
Keys
key in ignition chime . . .
positions of the ignition . .
removing from the ignition
stuck in lock position . . .
368 Index
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
130
129
.
.
.
.
60
59
60
59
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
L
Lamps
autolamp delay system . . . . . . .
bulb replacement specifications chart .
daytime running light system . . . .
dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .
flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . .
hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . .
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
high beams . . . . . . . . . . . .
illuminated mirrors . . . . . . . . .
instrument panel, dimming . . . . .
interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . .
map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) .
Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights, warning and indicator
air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
anti-lock brakes (ABS). . . . . . . .
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
charging system . . . . . . . . . .
door ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . .
hazard warning light . . . . . . . .
high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lamp out. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
low fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
low washer fluid . . . . . . . . . .
oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .
safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service engine soon . . . . . . . . .
speed control (see cruise control) . . .
turn signal indicator . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
108
322
107
111
116
118
106
115
155
110
110
111
215
115
21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
77
81
73
74
77
75
118
76
87
80
87
75
73
78
81
81
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Index 369
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Load limits . . . . . .
GAWR . . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . .
trailer towing . . . .
Lubricant specifications
Luggage compartment .
Luggage rack . . . . .
Lug nuts
anti-theft . . . . . .
standard . . . . . .
tightening sequence .
Lumbar support pad. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
208
208
208
211
330
158
163
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
232
227
229
149
.
.
.
.
. . 3
. 255
. 298
. 270
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
M
Maintenance schedule and record
(see separate Maintenance Schedule
and Record booklet) . . . . . . . .
Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . .
Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . .
Mileage, calculating fuel economy. . .
Mirrors
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
side view mirrors . . . . . . . . .
vanity mirror, illuminated . . . . .
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . .
104
153
155
144
329
N
National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 244
New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 5
370 Index
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
O
Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer
description . . . . . . . . . . .
trip odometer . . . . . . . . .
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . .
Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . .
On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
266
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
84
84
329
272
273
325
199
247
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
194,
. .
P
Panic alarm feature, remote
entry system . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake
operation . . . . . . . . . .
warning light. . . . . . . . .
Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . .
PCV valve, specifications . . . .
Phone, cellular . . . . . . . . .
Power distribution box (see Fuses)
Power door locks . . . . . . . .
Power features
door locks . . . . . . . . . .
lumbar support . . . . . . . .
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .
moon roof . . . . . . . . . .
seats. . . . . . . . . . . . .
windows . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . .
driving with power steering . .
fluid, checking and adding . .
fluid, refill capacity . . . . . .
fluid, specifications . . . . . .
servicing . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
135
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
205
. . 73
.
329
.
329
.
158
.
308
.
126
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
126
149
153
144
148
142
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
301
201
300
328
330
201
Index 371
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
R
Radio (see Electronic sound systems) .
Rear window
defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .
washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
washer reservoir . . . . . . . . .
Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . .
Regulations, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration . . . . . . .
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote entry system
arming and disarming the
anti-theft system . . . . . . . .
locking/unlocking doors . . . . . .
panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement/additional transmitters.
replacing the batteries . . . . . . .
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . .
Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)
adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ride control, Semi-Active. . . . . . .
Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . .
Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . .
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . .
. .
169
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
104
105
284
328
. .
. .
244
303
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136
134
135
137
136
244
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 9
. . 31
. 145
. . 31
. 202
. 237
. 217
. 163
. 290
.
.
.
.
.
. 206
. . 9
. 214
. 208
. 244
S
Safe driving tips. . . . . . . . . .
Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . .
Safety chains, when towing a trailer .
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Safety defects, reporting . . . . . .
Safety information relating to
automotive fuels . . . . . . . .
372 Index
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
268
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Safety restraints
adjusting the safety belts . . . .
automatic locking mode . . . . .
center front lap belt . . . . . . .
center rear lap belt . . . . . . .
cleaning the safety belts . . . . .
extension assembly . . . . . . .
for adults . . . . . . . . . . .
for children . . . . . . . . . .
for infants . . . . . . . . . . .
head. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lap and shoulder belts . . . . .
lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . .
maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
proper use . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement . . . . . . . . . .
warning light and chime . . . .
Safety seats for children
and air bags . . . . . . . . . .
attaching with tether straps . . .
automatic locking mode (retractor)
in front seat . . . . . . . . . .
in rear outboard . . . . . . . .
tether anchorage hardware . . .
Seat belts (see Safety restraints). . .
Seats
adjusting the seat, manual . . . .
adjusting the seats, power . . . .
child safety seats . . . . . . . .
cleaning upholstery . . . . . . .
head restraints . . . . . . . . .
lumbar support . . . . . . . . .
split-folding rear seat . . . . . .
Semi-Active ride control . . . . . .
Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . .
Service concerns . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12,
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
15, 21
. 14
. 21
. 21
. 23
. 22
.
9
. 31
. 31
145
. 12
. 21
. 23
.
9
. 23
. 73
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
26,
. .
14,
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
147
.
148
. . 33
.
151
.
145
.
149
.
149
.
202
.
240
.
238
33
43
33
35
35
43
9
Index 373
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Servicing your vehicle . . . . . . .
precautions when servicing . . .
servicing when you tow . . . . .
Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . .
Shift positions
(see Gearshift) . . . . . . . . .
Shoulder and lap belts
(see Safety restraints) . . . . . .
Shoulder belts
(see Safety restraints) . . . . . .
Side mirrors
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . .
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) .
Snow tires and chains . . . . . . .
Spare tire
changing the tire . . . . . . . .
conventional spare . . . . . . .
finding the spare . . . . . . . .
removing the spare tire . . . . .
storing the flat tire . . . . . . .
temporary spare . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs, specifications . . . . .
Special driving conditions . . . . .
Specification chart, lubricants . . . .
Speed control (see cruise control)
accelerating . . . . . . . . . . .
indicator light . . . . . . . . .
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . .
tap up/tap down . . . . . . . .
turning off . . . . . . . . . . .
when towing a trailer . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting your vehicle
preparing to start your vehicle . .
starting a cold engine . . . . . .
starting after a collision . . . . .
starting a warm engine . . . . .
starting your vehicle if the battery
is disabled . . . . . . . . . .
374 Index
. . .
. . .
. . .
. 192,
.
255
256
216
196
193, 197
. . . . 12
. . . . 12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
153
104
144
294
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
222
223
223
223
223
222
329
206
330
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
122,
. . .
122
81
123
123
124
216
84
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
.
.
.
.
61
62
65
62
217
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Steering, power . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel
horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
locking . . . . . . . . . . . .
speed controls . . . . . . . . .
tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments
cargo area . . . . . . . . . . .
cargo net . . . . . . . . . . .
center console . . . . . . . . .
locking storage . . . . . . . . .
Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . .
Sunroof (moon roof). . . . . . . .
Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental air bag readiness light
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
. . .
201
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
119
. . 59
.
120
.
119
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
160
161
156
161
331
144
154
77
23
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Tail lamps, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . .
108
Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 93
Tether anchor installation
(see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .
119
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
checking the pressure . . . . . . . . .
288
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
inspection and maintenance . . . . . .
288
replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
291
rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
290
snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . .
294
spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . .
333
tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
292
treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . .
291
Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . .
211
Index 375
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Towing your vehicle . . . . .
using wheel dollies . . . .
with a tow truck . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . .
calculating maximum trailer
safety chains . . . . . . .
tips . . . . . . . . . . .
trailer brakes . . . . . . .
trailer lamps . . . . . . .
Transaxle
automatic operation . . . .
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) . . . . . . .
fluid, refill capacities . . .
lubricant specifications. . .
Trip odometer. . . . . . . .
Tune-up specifications (VECI).
Turn signal
indicator lights . . . . . .
lever . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
weight .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
233
233
233
211
209
214
216
215
215
192, 195
.
.
.
.
.
. 296
. 328
. 330
. . 84
. 325
. . . . . . . 81
. . . . . . 115
U
Used engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . .
275
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . .
VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information)
decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . .
Vehicle loading
automatic transaxles . . . . . . . . . .
calculating the load . . . . . . . . . .
understanding loading information . . .
376 Index
155
117
325
240
209
209
208
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Vehicle storage . . . . .
Ventilating your vehicle
(see Climate control) .
Viscosity (see Engine oil)
Visor (see Sun visor) . .
. . . . . . . .
331
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
102
273
154
W
Wagon
cargo cover . . . . . . . . . .
cargo net . . . . . . . . . . .
liftgate window wiper and washer
luggage rack . . . . . . . . . .
Warm engine, starting . . . . . . .
Warning chimes
headlamps on . . . . . . . . .
key in ignition . . . . . . . . .
safety belt . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lights (see Lights). . . . .
Warranties
basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . .
radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Information Booklet . . .
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .
rear window reservoir . . . . .
reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . .
warning light. . . . . . . . . .
windshield . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . .
Wheel dollies (see Towing). . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
162
161
105
163
62
77
60
73
71
4
4
190
.
4
116
284
283
. 87
283
208
233
Index 377
File:fcixt.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996
Wheels
anti-theft lugnuts . . . . . . . . .
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inspection and maintenance . . . .
lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ornaments . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows
liftgate window . . . . . . . . . .
one-touch down. . . . . . . . . .
power windows, operating . . . . .
rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield
defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . .
washing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid and wipers
checking and adding fluid . . . . .
checking and replacing wiper blades
liftgate reservoir . . . . . . . . .
low washer fluid light . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . .
variable interval wipers . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . .
Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . .
378 Index
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
232
295
229
288
227
226
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
159
143
142
104
95, 103
. . 116
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 283
. 285
. 284
. . 87
. 116
. 283
. 117
. 116
. 233
File:17fcgst.ex
Update:Tue Jan 23 08:18:03 1996
Service Station
Information
[GS00500( T)10/95]
twenty-two pica chart:0001114-D
380

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Top types

Top brands

Download 1996 Taurus Owner Guide - Taurus